The URL can be used to link to this page

32C-024 (10) ti MAGNETIC Automation Corporation Address sales partner: 3160 Murrell Road Rockledge, Florida, 32955 USA Tel.: +1 321 635 8585 Fax.: +1 321 635 9449 E-Mail: info @ac-magnetic.com Internet: www.ac-magnetic.com F05456868 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGNETIC .. r 5815,5001 US/Version 02.6 195 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Index Aff C Malfunctions..................................................... 159 Repair...........................................................169 Master.............................................................. 136 Transport........................................................47 MHTMTM MicroDrive service expert................... 19 Safety devices Modifications...................................................... 18 Plausibility check............................................94 Mounting material Safety Instructions ...............................................3 Requirements...........................................66, 68 Safety light barrier..............................................69 0 Scope of delivery ............................................... 14 Occupational safety.....................................20, 21 Select program mode....................................... 112 Service switch.................................................. 122 Open/Closed button......................................... 116 Setup Operating Instructions........................................ 11 Program mode.............................................. 112 Operating Personnel Slave................................................................ 136 Requirements................................................. 19 Spare parts....................................................... 170 Operational view.............................................. 106 Specialised Staff................................................ 19 Output relay....................................................... 99 Specialists P Requirements................................................. 19 Parallel operation............................................. 136 Storage...............................................................49 Parameterising Switching off..................................................... 153 Options......................................................... 110 Switching on..................................................... 153 Values.......................................................... 111 Symbols Passenger car loops.................................... 50, 51 Control button functions............................... 107 Pendulum support........................................43, 44 Current program mode................................. 109 Personal protective equipment..........................20 Current state of the barrier........................... 108 Pictogram explanation....................................... 12 Current state of the induction loops ............. 109 Program mode Further.......................................................... 109 Deadman...................................................... 114 T Maintained contact....................................... 113 Technical data....................................................31 Pulse control................................................. 115 Transport............................................................49 Two-Pulse control ........................................ 116 Transport inspection ..........................................48 Pulse control.................................................... 115 Two-Pulse control............................................ 116 RType code..........................................................30 Radio plug-in module Type plate..........................................................29 Technical data................................................42 U Reinforcement..............................................57, 58 UL-Declaration................................................... 14 Reset barrier.................................................... 167 Unpacking S V Safety................................................................. 16 VarioBoom.........................................................43 Commissioning............................................. 151 Electrical connection...................................... 88 W Maintenance................................................. 155 Warning notes.................................................... 12 Malfunctions................................................. 159 Warning signs ....................................................87 Operation...................................................... 151 Warranty............................................................. 14 194 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 M Enc Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGN OOW Index Index A Dimensions Assemblehousing..............................................66 Access.............................................................31 Assembly Access Pro H ..................................................34 Housing...........................................................66 Parking............................................................37 Safetylight barrier...........................................69 Toll...................................................................39 Assembly and installation Disassembly.....................................................176 Required steps................................................55 Display Assembly site.....................................................57 Symbols........................................................107 Light barrier posts...........................................59 Disposal............................................................176 B E Balancing springs...............................................83 Electrical connection...........................................88 Check..............................................................82 Electrical specialists............................................19 Setting.............................................................82 Empty conduit Barrier arm..............................................43,44,45 Light barrier...............................................59, 60 Barrier housing 43,44, 45 Empty conduits.............................................57, 58 Bistable.............................................................115 Environmental protection....................................15 C F Change value ...................................................106 Foundation.................................43, 44, 45, 57, 58 Changes.............................................................18 Light barrier post.............................................60 Check Light barrier posts...........................................59 Assembly 7 Foundation plan............................................58,60 y........................................................ Before to initial start-up.................................152 Function..............................................................46 Electrical connection.....................................104 G Installation.......................................................87 General...............................................................11 Check assembly.................................................87 Grant of equipment authorization.....................179 Check installation ...............................................87 Cleaning............................................................156 H Commissioning.................................................152 Hazard Notes......................................................21 Connecting mains supply...................................91 Control buttons Function........................................................107 Identification........................................................29 Control elements..............................................105 Induction loops.......................................61, 64, 65 Control unit Inspection Displays........................................................106 During the first start-up..................................152 Technical data............................. Instructed People................................................19 Control unit control elements............................105 Intended use.......................................................16 Copyright............................................................13 L Customer service................................................14 Limitation of liability 13 D Loop detector plug-in module Danger area........................................................28 Technical data.................................................42 Deadman..........................................................114 Lorry loops..........................................................51 Decommissioning 176 Lorry/passenger car loops..................................52 Temporarily...................................................154 M Design.................................................................43 Maintained contact............................................113 Digital inputs.......................................................97 Maintenance.....................................................155 Digital outputs.....................................................99 Maintenance schedule......................................157 Malfunction Table.............................................160 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 193 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Appendix En` Main menu Prog.mode Setup Att achments a Service Information Motor GW Software# SW Version Motor temperature Motor-SW Detector 1 (A-B) Recalibratio= Mode A Mode B Sensitivity A .�,, Sensitivity B Frequency settings Freq.A Information Freq. B Freq.shift Channel A Ref.A Channel B Ref.B Detector 2(C-D)'� Radio control z� Number of transmitter Teach in remote control Delete remote control with remote control Information without remote control Ethemet s> a N Factory settings Fig. 65:Menu "Main menu"—Sub menus"Motor GIN", "Detector 1 (A-8)"and"Radio control" 1 Menu "Detector 2(C-D)"with second"Detector"plug-in module only(optional) 2 Menu "Radio control"with optional"Radio"plug-in module only 3 Menu "Ethernet"with optional"Ethernet"plug-in module only 192 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive � ,, Cam°"' Appendix Main menu Prog.mode Setup Attachments Signal light Signal mode A Signal mode B t Signal mode C Lead time Start event Boom release settings On/Off Automatic closing Closing delay Boom locking without boom lock boom locking Service Information Serial No. Hardware version Software# Software version Temperature Motor GW Detector 1 (A-B) Detector 2(C-D)i� l z>Rdo ro Ethernet 3i 9 M Factory settings Fig. 64:Menu"Main menu"—Sub menus'Attachments"and'Information" 1 Menu"Detector 2(C-D)"with second"Detector"plug-in module only(optional) 2 Menu"Radio control"with optional"Radio"plug-in module only A" 3 Menu"Ethernet"with optional"Ethernet"plug-in module only 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 191 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Appendix /1"M�` - Main menu Prog.mode Setup Barrier speed close Attachments Delays Hold-open time , Service ---- --- Closing delay Information Light barrier delay Impact delay Motor GW Out off angle Safety loop delay Detector 1 (A-B) Light barrier Detector(C-D)Z� Impact detection Radio control s> Inputs Input 1 —8 Outputs Digital output 1 —4 Ethemet 4) Relay 1 —6� Factory settings Vend count Reset behaviour - -- _Counter Impact settings Impact response Impact delay Automatic closing Start-up behay. Power failure Closure by light barrier Master/Slave m 0 Language Fig. 63:Menu "Main menu" 1 The parameter is displayed for the following boom types:Access Pro,Access Pro L,Access Pro H,Access Select and Access Select L, Parking Pro and Parking Select. 2 Menu 'Detector 2(C-D)"with second'Detector"plug-in module only(optional) 3 Menu'Radio control'with optional'Radio"plug-in module only 4 Menu "Ethernet"with optional"Ethernet"plug-in module only 190 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MA" Appendix 18.2 Menu setup r i Warnings Main menu 1 Inputs a A Prog.mode g Setup Attachments Service Information Motor GW Detector 1 (A-B) Detector 2(C-D)'� Radio control2� Ethernet s> Factory settings 8 Fig. 62:Menu"Main menu"and'information" 1 Menu"Detector 2(C-D)"with second"Detector"plug-in module only(optional) 2 Menu'Radio control'with optional"Radio"plug-in module only 3 Menu"Ethernet"with optional"Ethernet"plug-in module only 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 189 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P-1 10 3279,5028 0 A2 OUT ov-1 IN BN 24V c ---mw M�:z AN n.c. C. N.C. OV 2 0 ---Ew BL N.C. BK T Transmitter 3279,5029 A3 BN ..24V WH(n.c.) BL ov ow I BK Q I Receiver 3 10't0" MHTM safety-light.barriers LopticLnll ',K I T'7526,0012- (UL) USA - Standard 3 0 7 2 4 5 6 7 E3 9 1 P ,7r, Voltage supply cable MGC ; OUT;l,r:? I oo OV_l;�1.o-z 1 I 1 2020,5293 1 INi,a.o.z l Q.B:2 motor Interface cable J02tionl_ Al if no safety light barrier •�IIY i II�i ��IRI+�a; ,�� r — — — — — I is connected,place �i.,, i I Jumper W1, I X10 X9 X12 d b I A wSo oo�0 1 Ell 0000 0 a I 1 A2 B w . w 00000 -X20 -X11 I I B1 00 00 00 safety light barrier Loop I I Bz Al A2 -BI 82 inductive loop detector Module barrier controller MGC Transistor Outputs Relay Outputs rl N M d' Ln tp 1 N i0 _N t) tp tp t K cx' Cc K Inputs 24V DC I I I r r r — — - - — -- - — - — - — - - -1 r -- - - — - — - — -1 — — — — — — — —— - -1 r— -- — — ------- - — - - — — - - �1 I f °l >1 >1 ry v I 1 8 o g oo g oo zz z z -X l -X2 _X4 z z z ° I 3Q_ Q_J_ Q- J- QJQ Q Q J- Q_ Q_ Q_ Q_ J_ Q_ 3- Q`;_ Qz_J�1 I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I 1 1 I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I I I I 1 I 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I al I ml I I I I MI I 1 I I I 1 IDi I 1 I 1 I I I I 1 I 9j 1 tl I tl 1 1 I I %I I I I I I 1 �l I I I 1 'XI I I I I I NI I .� I -.°) 1 I I I ml I I I I I I �l I I I I WI I I I I 1 1 CI i �I 1 I I ICI I Q I I m l I U ICI I I cl I '01 I I I Sl I I of I of I 1 I I oCl I I 1 1 I L I �I I I pl 2I I I I �I I �I I �I 1 �1 I I I I �I I P I 1 :C I 1 21 1 p1 E} I I I I I 1 I I 1 1 1 CI �I I EI I I i M l I — I EI O I O I �1 �I �I I I {' I pl I gdil I I i 1 1 al �I 2I 01 I °�'I I p l I I El `dl `dl >I W W I 1 BL BN 1 ,°°I 1 C&I I I I 1 1 °I 0I a`il UI I I 10 I I V+ I UI I I l 1 O I I I I I I I 1 1 I I I I 1 I I I I I I CI C I CI I cl �I _I E '61 ® 1 r _1_ Ir _I_I Ir _I_I Ir a,I v I Qn,�I 'Cl }N,I `nl cnl o ` 1 !! I ! I ! I 1! I COL °� I °I ail of of g BK 1 lLi 1� 1 1� 1 111L�/1 1 V V V A V V V V V V A 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 11� 1 11� 1 '11[ 1 1 1 B A L'-J L _! L'-J L _! I I I I 1 1 I I _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ loops 2 q. MHTM barrier controller MGC = OJ �Y it ll Kil U y0 9f oI ut 1 'JP Inc Input/Output MicroDrive (UL) USA - Standard 5526,0012 Vertu LTt�. MotLficah r� noire Name G( �I1;4•. � vt 9 0 7. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2020,5293 Voltage supply cable MGC ;.,, GN; ( BR'f.0 WH Mi I 2 Q I I I I C 8 I CL I - - - - -- - - - - -- ----- W 2 .................... Motor Interface Kabel rya O O Mounting panel Voltage supply -u1 _ Power supply unit_ _ _ _ CIL �� — — — — —— — — —— - X6 4 N I 1 X5 X3 L N PE I m m m O I I I I I I I I main switch service socket 3460,5098 "x2r-----� -51r — — 1- — 31 3061,50041 F-- --N 1 2020,5294/5298 3046,5098 r __ _ _ _ _ Z 41 1 (Optio 1 3 1 4 1 2020,5295 I 2 1 —— — — 2020,5313 X4 PE X1 — — — — —t PE L, (Option) I I a main terminals block, L L N P PEI r — — — — — —t I I X31 I I I I L L N P PEI I I I I I 1 2 3 I L N PE 85 - 264V AC 50/601-lz to mounting plate 2 (Option) 1 3 MNTM main connection oz u u �n o n Power supply unit MicroDrive (UL) USA - Standard 5526,0012_ t ,t Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Appendix /Pam E 182 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive /P.-.Enc °"°R°``` Appendix 18 Appendix 18.1 Wiring diagrams Following wiring diagrams apply to standard barriers. Observe the customer specific wire diagrams for customer specific barriers if applicable. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 181 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive fiff c a�Ra 180 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 e ` GRANT OF EQUIPMENT T B AUTHORIZATION TC B Certification Issued Under the Authority of the Federal Communications Commission By: EMCC Dr.Rasek Date of Grant: 10/08/2003 Moggast D-91320 Ebermannstadt, Germany Application Dated: 10108/2003 SMD-Funksteuerungs GmbH Hans-Boeckler-Strasse 5 Rodgau, 63110 Germany Attention: Ulf Nordlander, Managing Director NOT TRANSFERABLE EQUIPMENT AUTHORIZATION is hereby issued to the named GRANTEE, and is VALID ONLY for the`equipment identified hereon for use under the Commission's Rules and Regulations listed below. FCC IDENTIFIER:.QV2 SVtD-532U0RX }' Name of Grantee: SIVID'� ? Equipment Class:Communications Receiver used w/Pt 15 Transmitter Notes: Radio Receiver Module 433 MHz AM Frequency Output Frequency Emission Grant Notes FCC Rule Parts Ranae(MHZ) Watts Tolerance Designator CE 15B 433.92 -' 433.92 CE: This device has shown compliance with the conducted emissions limits in 15.107, 15.207,or 18,307 adopted under FCC 02-157(ET Docket 98-80).The device may be marketed after July 11,2005,and is not affected by the 15.370)or 18.123 transition provisions. APW Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive AaMAGNMC ✓ r'Al1la. r 178 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 UL ONLINE CERTIFICATIONS DIRECTORY FDDR7.E136510 Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators and Systems Certified for Canada Page Bottom Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators and Systems Certified for Canada See General Information for Door,Drapery,Gate,Louver and Window Operators and Systems Certified for Canada MAGNETIC AUTOCONTROL GMBH E136510 GRIENMATT 20 79650 SCHOPFHEIM,GERMANY For commercial and Industrial use,Gate operators,Models LS130-01,-10,-11,-41,MI1320,MI1330,MI1335,MIB40,MSE3,MSV3,MSV4,MSV5, followed by X-YYY,where"X"is R or L and"YYY"is any number 000 thru 999,MTS-8. Models MBE30,MBE35,MBE50,followed by X-Cyyy,where"X"is R or L and yyy is 000 thru 999. Vehicular barrier gate operators,Series ACCESS,ACCESS PRO and ACCESS SEL,may be followed by L or H,followed by L or R,followed by C, followed by three digits,may be followed by one or two digits. Vehicular barrier gate operators,Series PARKING,PARKING PRO and PARKING SEL,may be followed by H,followed by L or R,followed by C, followed by three digits,may be followed by one or two digits. Vehicular barrier gate operators,Series TOLL and TOLL PRO,followed by L or R,followed by C,followed by three digits,may be followed by one or two digits. Last Updated on 2011-06-14 a� Questions? Print this page Notice of Disclaimer Page Top Copyright n 2011 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured under UL's Follow-Up Service.Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Listed and covered under UL's Follow-Up Service.Always look for the Mark on the product. UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1.The Guide Information,Designs and/or Listings(files)must be presented in their entirety and in a non-misleading manner,without any manipulation of the data(or drawings).2.The statement"Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with permission from Underwriters Laboratories Inc."must appear adjacent to the extracted material.In addition,the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the following format: "Copyright 2011 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.@" An independent organization working for a safer world with integrity, precision and knowledge. Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Aff., Decommissioning, disassembly and disposal MAGNETIC � ,Ifthk 15 Decommissioning, disassembly and disposal A barrier that is no longer usable should not be recycled as a complete unit, but disassembled into individual components and recycled according to material types. Non-recyclable materials have to be disposed of in an environmental-friendly manner. Decommissioning, disassembly and disposal of the barrier may only be carried out by specialised staff. Disassemble the barrier in reverse order from assembly. The barrier has to be disposed of in accordance with the respective country-specific regulations. NOTE! For expert information regarding disposal of electric equipment contact MAGNETIC or competent electricians. 176 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive _. MAGNETIC Repair 11. Switch on power supply. 12. Switch the"Service"switch on the control unit.The LED lights red. The display backlighting flashes. -->See page 122, chapter 10.7.7 Mode"Service". 13. Close the barrier with the middle right button 41"at the control unit. 14. Check the horizontal alignment of the barrier arm with a level and correct with the hexagon socket screws at the flange if necessary. 15. Switch the"Service"switch on the control unit.The LED must light green. 16. Switch off power supply. 17. Install the barrier housing door. 18. Attach and lock the barrier housing hood. O 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 175 Barrier MHTMT""MicroDrive AMAMCRepair 14.3.2 Barrier arm type "MicroBoom-T" 1. Secure barrier danger area e.g.with barrier tape. 2. Remove the barrier housing hood. 3. Remove the barrier housing door. WARNING! Danger of crushing between barrier arm and barrier housing! 4. Switch off power supply. Ensure that the system is powered down. Secure against reactivation. 5. The barrier must be open. Open barrier arm manually if required. 6. Remove barrier arm. For this, loosen the hexagon screw at the flange. Fig. 61:Remove barrier arm 7. Replacing the barrier arm. 8. Attach the new barrier arm to the flange using the hexagon screw. 9. Flush the barrier into the top-most position. The clamping lever must be at the stop for the'open"position. If required, push straight through the upper tool bore with a tool to press the lever arm from the dead point. -> See page 168, chapter 13.5. 10. Check the vertical alignment of the barrier arm with a spirit level and correct with the hexagon socket screws at the flange if necessary. 174 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M EnC Repair 13. Install end cap to the barrier arm. o Fig. 60:Install end cap 14. Push barrier arm with pre-assembled flange onto the flange shaft. 15. Align barrier arm vertically. 16. Install the flange on the flange shaft using the 4 hexagon socket screws.To tighten the screws evenly. Use a torque wrench with hexagon socket: 10 AF Tightening torque: 55.391 Ibf ft(75 Nm) 17. Close screws and threaded bores with the included grey plastic covers. 18. Push the barrier into the top-most position. The clamping lever must be at the stop for the'open"position. If required, push straight through the upper tool bore with a tool to press the lever arm from the dead point. -->See page 168, chapter 0. 19. Check the vertical alignment of the barrier arm with a level and correct with the hexagon socket screws at the flange if necessary. 20. Switch on power supply. 21. Switch the"Service"switch on the control unit.The LED lights red. The display backlighting flashes. —> See page 122, chapter 10.7.7 Mode"Service". 22. Close the barrier with the middle right button 41"at the control unit. 23. Check the horizontal alignment of the barrier arm with a level and correct with the hexagon socket screws at the flange if necessary. 24. Switch the"Service"switch on the control unit. The LED must light green. 25. Switch off power supply. 26. Install the barrier housing door. 27. Attach and lock the barrier housing hood. 28. Assemble edge protection. --).See page 68, chapter 8.7. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 173 I H-0—C g Auk Barrier MHTWM MicroDrive Repair 10. Remove end cap from the barrier arm. z Fig 57:Disassemble end cap f the 11. slide a slot nut into the 9�e�e peg s de of the barrier a mrrier arm.Place a slot nut on th O D Fig_ 58:Assemble slot nuts the with the 4 hexagon socket srotrus on of the 12. Attach the flange The shorter p two slot nuts to the barrier arm. flange must point towards the barrgorns cket:5 AF Use a torque wrench with hexag g; : 11.801 Ibf ft(16 Nm) Tightening torque o a Fig. 59:Assembling flange 5815,5001US I Version 02.66 172 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive f 1 '""Enc Repair 1. Secure barrier danger area e.g.with barrier tape. 2. Remove the barrier housing hood. 3. Remove the barrier housing door. WARNING! Danger of crushing between barrier arm and barrier housing! 4. Switch off power supply. Ensure that the system is powered down. Secure against reactivation. 5. The barrier must be open. Open barrier arm manually if required. 6. Disassemble flange from the flange shaft together with the barrier arm. For this, loosen the 4 hexagon socket screws 10 AF at the flange. 7. Remove the flange with the barrier arm. 0 o Fig. 55:Disassemble flange with barrier arm 8. Remove flange from the barrier arm. For this, loosen the 4 hexagon socket screws 5 AF at the barrier arm. Use slot nuts for the new barrier arm. ° o O G e Fig. 56:Disassemble flange 9. Replacing the barrier arm. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 171 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Repair Aff Enc 14.2 Spare parts WARNING! Risk of injury by incorrect spare parts! Incorrect or defective spare parts can result in damage, malfunctions or total failure and also impair safety. Therefore: — Use only the manufacturer's original spare parts. Procure spare parts from your dealer or directly from the manufacturer. For the address, see invoice, delivery note or the reverse of these instructions. Spare part lists can be obtained on request. 14.3 Replacing the barrier arm Danger of injury A CAUTION! Danger of injury! There is a danger of injury when mounting the barrier arm. Therefore: — Barrier arms as of a length of 14.8 ft(4.5 m) must be installed by two persons. We recommend also installing shorter barrier arms with two persons. 14.3.1 Barrier boom type "VarioBoom" and "MicroBoom" Do not grease ' NOTICE! Improper lubrication of components, in particular the counter bearing or flange shaft, may lead to damage of the equipment! Therefore: Do not grease the counter bearing and flange shaft. 170 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive IMMM01"MAGNEUC Repair 14 Repair 14.1 Safety See also safety notes on page 20, chapter 2.6"Occupational safety and special dangers". General A!' WARNING! ' Danger by inappropriate repair! Inappropriate repair can cause severe or lethal injuries. Therefore: — All repair work must only be performed by authorised MHTM service specialists. — Prior to work, ensure that there is sufficient assembly space. — Pay attention to tidiness and cleanness at the assembly site! Loosely stacked or lying around components and tools are accident sources. — Only use original spare parts or spare parts approved of by MAGNETIC. Procure spare parts from your dealer or directly from the manufacturer. For the address, see invoice, delivery note or the reverse of these instructions. — After completion of repair work, ensure that all covers are correctly mounted. Personal protective equipment The following must be worn during all repair work: Work clothes Protective gloves Safety shoes Protective helmet. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 169 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Malfunctions Arm 13.5 Closing or opening the barrier arm in case of power failure In case of power failure,the barrier arm may be in the lower or upper dead point. Le. the barrier arm can no longer be easily moved manually. In this case, proceed as follows: 1. Remove the barrier housing hood. 2. Remove the barrier housing door. 3. Press a tool straight into the lower tool bore. The lever arm is pressed from the dead point Upper tool bore for opening the barrier. Lower tool bore for closing the barrier. 4. Mount the door if applicable. 5. Attach and lock the hood if applicable. 1 0 e 0 2 Fig. 54: Top and bottom tool bore 1 Upper tool bore for opening the barrier. 2 Lower tool bore for closing the barrier 168 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 M Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAW Malfunctions 13.3.4 Warning and interference messages — All modules Number Description ' Possible cause Corrective action 6010 � Watchdog reset SW error a Contact service if required. WARNING 8110 Bus fault Warning Contact service if required. WARNING 8120 Bus HW fault Warning Check DIP switch next to WARNING service interface (position ON) Remove devices at service interface if required. Table 64: Warning and interference messages—All modules 13.4 Reset the barrier Control unit reset is performed as follows: Switch of power supply and switch it on again after 10 seconds. or 6 Press the two middle control buttons on the display for 5 POW" seconds. -->See page 106, Fig. 44. NOTICE! ' NOTICE! Damage to the unit by too-short switching intervals of the mains voltage! Therefore: To avoid damage to the equipment the power must remain shut off for at least 10 seconds. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 167 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Malfunctions AaMAGN nc Or m� Number Description Possible cause Corrective action FF37 Motor update failed An error occurred when 13 Perform reset. —)�SeeY ERROR updating the software page 167, chapter 13.4. Contact service if required. FF3A Motor update was Message serves information — WARNING performed purposes Table 62: Warning and interference messages—motor GW 13.3.3 Warning and interference messages - Detector Number Description Possible cause Corrective action FF4A y Hardware error ) Internal HW function test failed 3.6 Perform reset. -4 See�� ERROR page 167, chapter 13.4. -v= Contact service if required. FF413 Loop error A Short circuit or idle loop A Remove loop error and WARNING perform adjustment. If no loop is connected, select the option"Inactive" in the menu "Detector". FF4C Loop error B Short circuit or idle loop B Remove loop error and WARNING perform adjustment. If no loop is connected, select the option"Inactive" in the menu"Detector". FF4D Loop error C Short circuit or idle loop C Remove loop error and WARNING perform adjustment. If no loop is connected, select the option"Inactive" in the menu "Detector". FF4D Loop error D Short circuit or idle loop D Remove loop error and WARNING perform adjustment. If no loop is connected, select the option "Inactive" in the menu "Detector". Table 63: Warning and Interference Messages-Detector 166 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M innc Malfunctions 13.3.2 Warning and interference messages — Motor GW Number Description E Possible cause Corrective action 2220 Overcurrent Overcurrent was recognised _ Warning may appear in WARNING connection with impact. If no impact took place, check the cables. Contact service if required. 3211 Overvoltage Overvoltage was recognised Warning may appear in WARNING connection with impact. If no impact took place, check the cables. ci Contact service if required. 3221 __. Undervoltage Undervoltage was recognised Warning may appear in WARNING connection with impact. If no impact took place, check the cables. Contact service if required. 4210 Overtemperature A high temperature was Check motor temperature WARNING recognised. via display. The temperature must be below 100 °C. —>See page 142, chapter 10.14. Contact service if required. 4220 Derating error Motor power intake is reduced Remove impermissible WARNING to avoid further temperature attachments increase. Check the spring setting of the balancing springs. Reduce speed of the barrier , arm. Contact service if required. FF30� Impact detection Impact was recognised. Check safety devices. WARNING Adjust menu"Cut off angle" See page 126, chapter 10.10.3. = If there was no impact on an E obstacle/vehicle, check the spring settings of the balancing springs and mechanics. 7510 Motor Communication between motor Verify cables ERROR communications and control impaired or Contact service if required. error interrupted _.... _ i FF32 HW-Enable-Test — Contact service. ERROR failed FF33 � LS-Test failed Safety light barrier test failed Check light barrier and light ERROR barrier connection. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 165 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Malfunctions A�"'"G"Enc Number Description Possible cause Corrective action FF05 Book contact At the"Boom contact" input, Barrier with SwingAway and WARNING Swing-sway active boom ejection was detected. automatic return: Wait for delay. Barrier with SwingAway and automatic return: Put barrier arm in the original position manually. Barriers without Swing Away.- Replace the barrier arm If required, choose the option"Without boom locking"in the"Boom locking" menu. Verify cables FF06 Vandalism The barrier arm was either lifted In the closed position, check WARNING from the lower end position or that the lever system latches. stopped when closing. FF30 Impact detection Impact was recognised by the Wait for a few seconds. The WARNING input"external impact contact". barrier closes if no obstacle is below the barrier arm anymore. When no obstacle is present AOW* below the barrier arm, check input, e.g. contact strip. 3120 Mains voltage Short-term mains outage was ap, Check supply voltage/mains ERROR fluctuations recognised quality 5530 EEPROM Check sum of the parameter Re-set parameters to factory ERROR checksum incorrect defaults. -->See page 150, chapter 10.18. Contact service if required. 6105 Error during The barrier could not perform 10 Check motor ERROR homing any reference run. communication. Check mechanics. Perform reset. ->See page 167, chapter 13.4. 8130 Note monitoring Communication with a plug ra Check if all plugged WARNING module was interrupted. modules are listed in the main menu. Perform reset. -->See page 167, chapter 13.4. Contact service if required. Table 61:Warning and interference messages-logic control(control unit) -Amok, 164 5815,5001 US Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive /Z enc ,. tr ON ` Malfunctions 13.3 Warning and interference messages on the display The control unit display indicates the corresponding warning or error message in case of an error. Warning messages Warning messages serve as notice.The barrier continues to operate normally. Error messages In case of error messages,the barrier is shut down. For the barrier to be started up again the error must be removed by an MHTM MicroDrive service specialist and a reset performed pursuant to chapter 13.4. --> For requirements to the MHTM MicroDrive service specialist, see page 19, chapter 2.4. 13.3.1 Warning and interference messages — Logic control (Control unit) Number Description Possible cause Corrective action FF01 Error barrier The first closing motion could If required, remove obstacle ' WARNING mechanics not be performed completely. below the barrier arm. Check barrier mechanics. Check the spring setting of the balancing springs. FF02 Detector Communication between logic Perform reset. �See WARNING monitoring signal control and detector module page 167, chapter 13.4. impaired. Check plug contacts. Clean plug contacts with spirit. Observe ESD provisions. Replace the control unit. FF03y)T _w Monitoring device No monitoring loop is Connect either the safety loop ERROR is missing connected to the detector or safety light barrier. —>See module and no safety light page 181, chapter 18.1. barrier to the clamps X11 and X20. Safety device defective Replace safety device. Sensitivity settings in the Change sensitivity. —> See "Detector" menu too low. Not all page 143, chapter 10.15. vehicles are recognised. FF04 Barrier too fast Spring tension in the balancing Adjust balancing springs. ERROR springs of the lever system set See page 82, too weakly for the barrier arm chapter 8.13. weight. Contact service if required. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 163 Barrier MHTMT""MicroDrive MAGN Malfunctions Aam M Malfunction Possible cause Corrective action To be carried a out by Barrier does not The message appears after ~$ The barrier closes once a Operator close. The the voltage supply is switched vehicle passes. message on, after voltage returns and See page 131, chapter "Waiting for after reset. 10.10.8. authorization" Confirm message via the left appears on the button at the control device. display. Barrier does not Spring tension in the balancing Adjust balancing springs. MHTM close completely. springs of the lever system set -4 See page 82, chapter 8.13. MicroDrive too strongly for the barrier arm service weight. specialist Impact was recognized. Wait several seconds, barrier — closes if no obstacle is below the barrier arm anymore. Barrier does not Loop not connected. Connect loop MHTM close. The Detector mode incorrectly Check the parameters of the MicroDrive display shows: service parameterised. detector module and correct it if necessary. —>See page 143, specialist chapter 10.15. Loop defective. Replace loop. Transfer resistance at the Cut connecting leads, strip and terminals connect them again without end sleeves. Barrier closes, "Safety loop"not selected for Select option"Safety loop". MHTM although a "Mode A"or"Mode B"in the MicroDrive vehicle is menu "Detector 1 (A-B)". service standing he ...�aa_ _ _ .__, _ .cut� .Y g on Cut off angle incorrectly Check and adjust the off specialist safety loop. parameterised. angle. Too low trigger sensitivity set Check the response sensitivity of for the loop. the loop and adjust if necessary. Inappropriate loop geometry is . Install an appropriate loop installed. geometry. _ . _ Loop interference due to Check the operating frequency of external loop detectors or other the loops and adjust if necessary barriers in the proximity. Safety light barrier connected Check safety light barrier incorrectly or defective. function. User misbehaviour e.g. driving Retrofit signal light, such as into closing barrier, or following red/green signal light and behind another vehicle. parameterise lead time. Y' Upgrade signs. Operator Table 60:Malfunction table—Barrier � 162 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive /f MAGN Enc Malfunctions Malfunction Possible cause ; Corrective action To be carried out by Barrier does not Spring tension in the balancing Adjust balancing springs. MHTM open completely. I springs of the lever system set See page 82, chapter 8.13. MicroDrive too weakly for the barrier arm service weight. specialist Barrier does not Opening signal is active for too Shorten opening signal to max. Electrical close long. 1 second. specialist immediately after _ through traffic, Safety loop does not respond. Check the response sensitivity of MHTM but only after the `' the safety loop.Adjust setting if MicroDrive hold-open time. necessary. service specialist Barrier does not Opening command is active. Cancel the opening command. Electrical close. specialist Induction loop reports Check and if necessary adjust MHTM engaged, although no vehicles loop frequencies. MicroDrive are present Measure loops. service Insulation resistance: specialist > 1 Mohm contact resistance: 0.8 to 2.5 ohm Replace loop if the measured values differ from the specified values. Wire bridge between terminals If no safety light barrier is MHTM X11 IN and OUT missing. connected, a wire bridge must be MicroDrive installed between the clamps service X11 OUT and IN. -->See specialist page 181, chapter 18.1. Message"Boom contacts Barrier with Swing Away and I Operator active":At the'Boom contact" automatic return:Wait for input, boom ejection was delay. detected. Barrier with Swing Away and _ Operator manual return: Put barrier arm ' in the original position manually. Barrier without Swing Away: MHTM Replace the barrier arm MicroDrive service specialist Barrier does not The message appears after The release signal can be given Operator close.The the voltage supply is switched by an external closing signal or message on, after voltage returns and by pushing the left operating "Waiting for after reset. button at the control unit.—>See release"appears page 131, chapter 10.10.8. on the display. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 161 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Malfunctions Aff R" Danger of injury after lightning strike WARNING! ' Danger of injury from total outage or barrier • malfunction after lightning has hit the barrier! If the barrier is struck by lightening, this may lead to total outage or malfunction of the barrier.The malfunction may cause unexpected barrier behaviour and thus lead to serious injury! Therefore: — If the barrier is struck by lightening, have an electrician check the barrier for damage and proper function. Repair barrier if required. — Observe possible movements of the barrier arm. Defective control may lead to inadvertent movement of the barrier arm. 13.2 Malfunction table — barrier malfunctions —*For requirements to the MHTM MicroDrive service specialist, see page 19, chapter 2.4.1. Malfunction Possible cause Corrective action To be carried AWW i out by Barrier out of No safety loop is connected to Connect either the safety loop or Electrical operation. The the plug-in module"Detector" safety light barrier. specialist message"Safety and no safety light barrier to See page 181, chapter 18.1. device missing" the clamps X11 and X20. appears on the display. The safety device is defective. Replace safety device. Barrier does not The safety device is defective. Replace safety device. _ Electrical open. _ _ specialist Error present. The correspond- Depending on error message, MHTM ing error message is displayed. check components,wiring, etc. MicroDrive service specialist Power supply is present. Control unit defective. Replace MHTM Control unit display does not the control unit. Contact service. MicroDrive light up. service specialist Loop interference due to Check the operating frequency of MHTM external loop detectors or other : the loops and adjust if necessary MicroDrive barriers in the proximity. service specialist Closing signal is active. Remove closing signal Electrical specialist 160 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M C Malfunctions 13 Malfunctions This chapter describes possible causes of malfunctions and trouble shooting tasks. Contact your dealer in case of malfunctions that cannot be repaired by means of the following information. Procure spare parts from your dealer or directly from the manufacturer. For the address, see invoice, delivery note or the reverse of these instructions. 13.1 Safety See also safety notes on page 20, chapter 2.6"Occupational safety and special dangers". General WARNING! Danger of injury from inappropriate • troubleshooting! Inappropriate troubleshooting can cause severe or lethal injuries. Therefore: — All troubleshooting work must be performed by specialists or electronics specialists. — Observe possible movements of the barrier arm.A defective control unit may lead to inadvertent movement of the barrier arm. — Prior to work, ensure that there is sufficient assembly space. — Pay attention to tidiness and cleanness at the assembly site! Loosely stacked or lying around components and tools are accident sources. — Deactivate the barrier if any components are damaged,e.g. the barrier arm. — After completion of troubleshooting, ensure that all covers are correctly mounted. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 159 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Maintenance AR NEnC Interval Maintenance work To be carried out by Every 12 months Check the barrier's mechanics. MHTM MicroDrive service specialist Check the spring setting of the lever system. Check barrier arm position. Visual inspection of the induction loops and the roadway for damage. Check the induction loops'function. See page 144. Check the induction loops. Measure the contact resistance, insulation resistance, and inductance of the induction loops. See page 63. Where they exist, check the function of additional safety equipment, such as light barriers. Check the barrier's function. Check the parameter settings. See page 105 et seq. Check the barrier's locking in the position "Closed". Check the advanced warning on barriers with the active function"Traffic lights lead". Check electric cables for damages. Check if all electrical connections are firm. Check signs and labels for legibility. Check foundation fastening. The cleaning interval Cleaning barrier arm. Specialist depends on the environmental Clean barrier housing from the inside. Specialist conditions and the climate. Table 59:Maintenance schedule Wit, 158 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M Enc Maintenance 12.3 Maintenance schedule The following describes the maintenance work that is necessary for optimal,trouble-free operation. Maintenance intervals must be observed. If increased wear of individual components or functional groups is revealed during regular inspections, the operator must reduce the required maintenance intervals on the basis of the actual signs of wear. In case of queries regarding the maintenance work and intervals: contact the manufacturer(for service address, refer to page 2). 3 Interval ' Maintenance work To be carried out by Monthly Visual inspection of the housing, inside and out,for Specialist damage and corrosion. Clean the housing and repair paint damage as necessary. Remove corrosion damage. Visual inspection of foundation anchors, U-profiles Specialist and mounting material for corrosion. Remove corrosion damage. Visual inspection of the barrier arm for damage and Specialist corrosion. Clean the barrier arm and repair paint damage as necessary. Remove corrosion damage. Visual inspection of additional parts, light barrier Specialist posts and the pendulum support for damage and corrosion. If necessary, clean additional parts, light barrier posts and pendulum support and repair paint damage. Remove corrosion damage. Where they exist, inspect lenses and mirrors of the Specialist light barriers. Every 6 months Check function of the ground fault circuit interrupter Electrical specialist (GFCI). Check the barrier casing fastening screws for tight Specialist fit. If required,tighten the screws. Check the screws of the additional parts, pendulum Specialist support and light barrier post for tight fit. If required, tighten the screws. Check the barrier arm and flange fastening screws Specialist for tight fit. If required,tighten the screws. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 157 11 IN Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Maintenance ARVIC 12.2 Cleaning The cleaning interval essentially depends on the environmental conditions and the climate. Aggressive cleaning aids and substances NOTICE! Unit damage possible! Aggressive detergents and consumables may damage or destroy components, electric cables, or the coating of the barrier. Therefore: — Do not use cleaning agents with aggressive ingredients. Carrying out cleaning work: 1. Switch off power supply and secure against restarting. DANGER! Mortal danger by electric voltage! i Keep moisture and dust away from live parts. Moisture or dust may cause a short circuit. Never clean the barrier housing and barrier arm with vapour or pressure-jet cleaners. 2. Remove contamination from the outside of the barrier housing properly using water with washing-up liquid and a square of cloth. Do not bring control units and electrical components in contact with moisture. 3. Remove dust inside the housing with a vacuum cleaner. 4. After cleaning work, check that all previously opened covers are closed again and that all safety equipment functions correctly. 156 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMT"MicroDrive M EnC 00K � Maintenance 12 Maintenance 12.1 Safety See also safety notes on page 20, chapter 2.6"Occupational safety and special dangers". General it WARNING! 7Danger by inappropriate maintenance! Inappropriate start-up and operation can cause severe or lethal injuries. Therefore: — All maintenance work must be performed by specialists or electrical specialists. — Prior to work, ensure that there is sufficient assembly space. — Pay attention to tidiness and cleanness at the assembly site! Loosely stacked or lying around components and tools are accident sources. — After completion of maintenance work, ensure that all covers are correctly mounted. — Wear protective helmet. Personal protective equipment The following must be worn during maintenance work: =u Work clothes Protective gloves Safety shoes Protective helmet. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 155 Barrier MHTMT""MicroDrive MAGNM Start-up and operation MM 11.4 Putting the barrier temporarily out of operation High wind speeds 1 AWARNING! Risk of injury from barrier arm in case of high wind speeds! The barrier arm is no longer securely locked with the mains voltage off.At high wind speeds, the barrier arm can be pressed from its end position. The moving barrier arm can severely injure a person. Therefore: - Keep supplying the barrier with mains voltage. - Remove the barrier arm if necessary. • NOTICE! Possible damage to the equipment by condensed water when mains voltage is switched off! Therefore: ` - Keep supplying the barrier with mains voltage. If the barrier is put out of operation for a longer period, proceed as follows: 1. Switch off barrier. -4 See page 152, chapter 11.3. 2. Remove the barrier arm if necessary. -4 See page 170, chapter 14.2. 3. Protect the barrier from corrosion and contamination. 4. Switch on barrier. ->See page 152, chapter 11.3. 154 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M NETIC AOW ff" ' Start-up and operation Switching on 1. Remove the barrier housing hood. 2. Remove the barrier housing door. 3. Switch on the barrier via the double pole mains switch. 4. Depending on the settings in the"Start-up behaviour"menu, the barrier arm slowly moves into the top end position (homing run) or stops. 5. Mount the door. 6. Attach and lock the hood. Switching off 1. Remove the barrier housing hood. 2. Remove the barrier housing door. 3. Switch off the barrier via the double pole mains switch. 4. Depending on the settings of the lever system's balancing spring and the settings in the menu"Start-up behaviour", the barrier arm opens or closes. —).See page 82, chapter 8.13 and page 135, chapter 10.10.9. 5. Mount the door. 6. Attach and lock the hood. Aolk 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 153 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Start-up and operation fiff NE1c mmR ' . 11.2 Commissioning Check before The following inspections must be performed prior to initial start-up: to initial start-up Check electrical connections. Check barrier arm position. Check balancing springs in the lever system and adjust if required. Inspection during the The following inspections must be performed prior to first start-up: first start-up F Check program mode. —>See page 112, chapter 10.7. Check parameterisation in connection with wiring. Testing and setting the operating frequency of the induction loops. —>See page 144, chapter 10.15.1. Check the function of the barrier, induction loops, safety light barriers and the signalling devices. 11.3 Switching on and off the barrier NOTICE! NOTICE! A too early mains voltage power up after a shut down can result in damage of the equipment! Therefore: Wait for at least 10 seconds after shutting off the mains voltage before you switch the mains voltage on again. k 1 2 8 Fig. 53:Switching on and off the barrier 1 Service socket(WARNING:Service socket is live, also when mains switch is switched off.) 2 Double pole mains switch 152 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MVEnC .. � Start-up and operation 11 Start-up and operation 11.1 Safety See also safety notes on page 20, chapter 2.6"Occupational safety and special dangers". General - WARNING! ' Danger by inappropriate start-up and operation! • Inappropriate start-up and operation can cause severe or lethal injuries. Therefore: — Commissioning and operation must be performed by specialists or electronics specialists. — Always observe the radius of action of the barrier arm. — Prior to start of works ensure that all housing covers are correctly mounted. Wind forces over 10 Beaufort WARNING! Risk of injury from breaking off barrier arms in • case of high wind speeds! In case of wind speeds exceeding 10 Beaufort,the barrier arm may break off from the wind load and cause severe injuries. Therefore observe in case of storm warnings above 10 Beaufort: — Disassemble barrier arm or secure it with suitable measures. — Stop operating the barrier system. Personal protective equipment The following must be worn during start-up: Work clothes Protective gloves Safety shoes ~: Protective helmet. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 151 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Parameterising control unit Aff "` 10.18 Factory Settings Reset parameters This menu can be used to reset the parameters to factory settings. 1. The operating view is displayed. —>See page 106, Fig. 44 2. Press right operating button A. 3. The"Main menu"menu is displayed. 4. Select the menu"Factory Settings"with the two middle buttons*,+. 5. Confirm selection with the right control button 1Ir. 6. Enter password "0 0 0 0". 7. Confirm password with the right control button 11�. 8. The message'Reset to factory settings"appears. 9. Press right operating button V. 10. The safety prompt"Save changes?"appears. If the changes are to be saved, press the right button Nf. The current settings are reset to factory settings. Restart is performed If the changes are not to be saved, press the left button X 11. Press the left button 40 repeatedly until the operating view is displayed again. 150 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M MAGWC�°"'"°`` Parameterising control unit Delete remote control 1. The operating view is displayed. —>See page 106, Fig. 44. 2. Press right operating button o . 3. The"Main menu"menu is displayed. 4. Select the menu 'Radio control FM"with the two middle buttons-*, +. 5. Confirm selection with the right control button 1f. 6. Select the parameter"delete remote control'with the two middle buttons +, + 7. Confirm selection with the right control button 1 . 8. The options"With remote control'and"With number"are displayed. 9. Select an option with the two middle buttons . 10. Confirm selection with the right control button 1f. Option "with remote control" The option "With remote control'was selected 1. The message"press button"appears. 2. Press the button on the hand transmitter. 3. The message"Successful'appears.The number for the parameter"Number transmitter"is decreased by one. 4. Press the left button+3 repeatedly until the operating view is displayed again. Option "with number" The option"With number"was selected 1. Enter hand transmitter number. 2. Use the left button 4' to leave the menu. 3. The safety prompt"Save changes?"appears. If the hand transmitter is to be deleted, press the right button 1r. If the hand transmitter is to be deleted, press the left button X. 4. The"Delete remote control' menu is displayed. 5. Press the left button+3 repeatedly until the operating view is displayed again. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 149 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Parameterising control unit /Z EnC Set hand transmitter code The hand transmitter code is set via DIP switches in the hand transmitter.We recommend changing the DIP switches'standard settings. 1. Open hand transmitter housing. For this, press the coloured pressure point while pulling up the upper housing part at the same time. 2. Change and document the DIP switches' settings. In case of 2-channel hand transmitters, the DIP switches 11 and 12 must be in the ON position. ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Fig. 52: Example DIP switches settings, DIP switch 11 and 12 only for 2-channel hand transmitter in ON position 3. Close housing. Teach in remote control 1. The operating view is displayed. —>See page 106, Fig.44. 2. Press right operating button A. 3. The"Main menu" menu is displayed. Aak 4. Select the menu "Radio control"with the two middle buttons 5. Confirm selection with the right control button 1 . 6. Select the parameter"Teach in remote control"with the two middle buttons *, +. 7. Confirm selection with the right control button 1Or. 8. The message"Press button"appears. 9. Press the button on the hand transmitter. For the 2-channel hand transmitter, the corresponding channel is paired with the radio module. 10. The message"Successful"appears on the display. The number for the parameter"Number of transmitter"is increased by one. 11. Press the left button*3 repeatedly until the operating view is displayed again. 148 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive "" enc Parameterising control unit 10.16 Menu "Detector 2 (C-D)" This menu is displayed if a second plug-in module with the function "Detector"was plugged into the control unit. This menu is used to reference the induction loops C and D. The menu"Detector 2 (C-D)"corresponds to the menu "Detector 1 (A-D)". —>See page 143, chapter 10.16. 10.17 Menu "Radio control" The"Radio control' menu is displayed when the"radio'plug-in module is plugged into one of the control unit slots. The hand transmitters are available as 1 and 2-channel versions. With the 2-channel version,2 barriers can be operated independently of each other with a hand transmitter. If you want to operate the barrier via hand transmitter, manual program mode 3 or one of the automated program modes 5 to 8 must be selected. The barrier is opened by pressing the button on the hand transmitter. The closing function depends on the selected program mode. In automatic modes 5 to 8,the barrier is closed automatically. In program mode 3, the barrier is closed by repeated pressing of the button on the hand transmitter.After pressing the button on the hand transmitter, the hand transmitter number is indicated in the display. A radio module can manage up to 100 hand transmitters. Operating view Main menu Radio control Parameters ` Description Number of transm. Display of number of hand transmitters with which the barrier can be opened (Number of transmitter) Teach in remote control Use this parameter to pair a hand transmitter with the radio module. Delete remote control Use this parameter to revoke a pairing between a hand transmitter and the radio module. Options With remote control Dissolve pairing by pressing a button on the hand transmitter. With number Dissolve pairing by entering the hand transmitter number. Information Displays information about the plug-in module'Radio". Here,the hardware version, software version and serial number(SerNo)of the plug-in module are displayed. Table 58:Menu 'Radio control' 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 147 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Aff Parameterising control unit � -"%, Frequency value of the If the frequency value of an induction loop is unstable,this un-assigned induction loop induction loop is influenced by an induction loop of another barrier unstable or an external detector. The detector channels do not influence each other. Depending on the loop geometry and settings of the external detector, set the menu"Freq. Shift"to"Low"or"High". 1. The operating view is displayed. -->See page 106, Fig.44. 2. Press right operating button of'. 3. The"Main menu"menu is displayed. 4. Select the menu "Detector 1 (A-B)"with the two middle buttons+ , +. 5. Confirm selection with the right control button 4f. 6. The"Detector 1 (A-B)"menu is displayed. 7. Select the menu"Frequency settings"with the two middle buttons*, +. 8. Confirm selection with the right control button 1f. 9. The"Frequency settings"menu is displayed. 10. Select the menu "Freq. Shift"with the two middle buttons 11. Confirm selection with the right control button V. 12. The"Freq. Shift"menu is displayed. 13. Select the parameter"Channel A"or"Channel B"with the two middle buttons +, +. 14. Confirm selection with the right control button 11 . 15. The corresponding menu is displayed. 16. Select the option "Low"or"High"for the respective channel with the two middle buttons +, +. 17. Use the right button V to select the option. Your selection is marked with the symbol LVJ. 18. Use the left button+0 to leave the menu. 19. The safety prompt"Save changes?"appears. If the changes are to be saved, press the right button NIF. If the changes are not to be saved, press the left button X. 20. Press the left button+0 repeatedly until the operating view is displayed again. 21. Test the operating frequencies. For another plug-in module,the menu "Detector 2 (C-D)"is displayed in the main menu. Reconciliation is performed for the induction loops A and B. 146 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M EnC " Parameterising control unit 10.15.2 Reconciling and setting the operating frequency of the induction loop Operating frequency requirements The operating frequency must fulfil following requirements: When driving over the induction loop with a vehicle, a significant frequency increase must be measurable. Chose stage 5 or 6 for sensitivity. The relative frequency change (4f/f) must be at least 0.1%. The higher the relative frequency increase,the higher the operating safety of the induction loop. The induction loops of a control unit operate alternating, and can therefore not affect each other. However,to avoid interferences by frequency coupling from external loop detectors or other control units in the direct proximity, a frequency clearance of at least 10000 Hz must be kept between them. For this, the menu"Freq. Shift"is used to set the frequency option to"Low"or"High", or to deactivate or adjust the induction loop windings number. Reference working frequency via 1. The operating view is displayed. —4 See page 106, Fig.44. the menu"Information" (1) 2. Press left operating button i. 3. Press the left control button repeatedly, until the menu "Detector 1 (A-B)"is displayed. -4 See page 144, Fig. 51. Amok 4. Press second operating button from the left A. 5. The barrier is referenced.The loop symbols flash during reconciliation. 6. Check working frequencies. If required, perform settings like sensitivity, etc. in the menu "Detector 1 (A-B)"in the main menu. 7. Perform one of the following steps: For a"Detector"plug-in module: Use the right button 4*3 to leave the"Detector 1 (A-B)"menu. The operating view is displayed. For two"Detector" plug-in modules: Press the third opera- ting button from the left'If"'. The"Detector 2(C-D)"menu is displayed. 8. The barrier is referenced. The loop symbols flash during reconciliation. 9. Check working frequencies. If required, perform settings like sensitivity, etc. in the menu"Detector 2(C-D)"in the main menu. 10. Use the right button 411 to leave the"Detector 2 (C-D)" menu. The operating view is displayed. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 145 Barrier MHTMTM Miomomm MAGWC Para0Meterising control unit /Z Operating view Main menu Setup Detector I (A-B)-+Frequency settings Parameters Description Freq.A Displays the currently measured frequency for induction loop A Freq. B Displays the currently measured frequency for induction loop B Freq. Shift Interference influences, e.g.from external loop detectors or induction loops of barriers close by can influence the frequency of loops A and B. Use the parameter"Freq. Shift"to change the frequency values for loops A(channel A) and B (channel B) by approx. 10%and thus reduce the influence of loops A i ------ --' - ------'----------------- --- -- -' --- ----------'---------- � =." ". - � \ Options for channels A and B. / | � High: high frequency value � Ref value A Displays the reference frequency for induction loop A�� --- --------- '| Ref value B | Diup|ayothoro�venoefn�uenoyforinduodonkmpB� �� -'---- Table 5T Menu "Frequency settings" 10.15'1 Check the working frequency of the induction loops' 1. The operating view is displayed. -->See page 1OO. Fig.44. %. Press the left control button i repeatedly, until the menu "Detector 1 (A+8)^iodisplayed. z 3 f: 25454 Hz 38576 Hz 1 * Fig. ot Example "View-Menu Detector/(A-B)^ / Relative frequency of induction loop A o Currently measured frequency uf induction loop A 3 Currently measured frequency nf induction loop 8 * Relative frequency nf induction loop B 5 ff another optional detector module is present: Switching between the two detector modules 0 Rome8bmtionof the induction loops 3. Use the right button+010 leave the"Detector 1 (A+B)''menu. The operating view iodisplayed. 144 5815.5O01US/Version O2.80 Barrier MHTMTM Micnorive X Para0Neterising control unit AOW ~ 10.15 Menu "Detector 1 (A-13)°, This menu io used to reference the induction loops A and B. Operating view Main menu-+-+Detector I (A-113) Parameters Description ' Rexanuruunn ' Start reference u/the induction loops(u:xvutv) ------------''—' ------ -----------------------------------------------1 Mode Select position and function of loop A. i _ Options | � Inactive i � Induction loop iu not present or not relevant for evaluation. ` | � Active The induction loop state io put on the output with function "Loop acdvo^ | i Internally, the induction loop condition ia not used. � Safety loop The induction loop assumes the function of the safety loop. Opening entry | � The induction loop assumes the function nf the opening loop on the entry ( lane. � Open exit i ! The � Presence entry The induction loop assumes the function of the presence loop on the entry Presence exit The induction loop assumes the function of the presence loop on the exit Mode B Select position and function of loop B. For description, see parameter"Mode A". Set the response sensitivity of the induction loop A. The response sensitivity is Sensitivity A divided into increments. Factory setting ' | Setting range Sensitivity B Set the response sensitivity of the induction loop B. For description, see parameter"Sensitivity A". Frequency settings See page 144, Table 57 Information Displays information about the plug-in module"Detector 1 (A—B)". Here, the serial number(SerNo), hardware version, software#and software version of the plug-in module are displayed. Table 56:Menu "Detector/(A-B)^ 5815.5001US/Version O2.06 143 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGNEn Parameterising control unit Aff C 10.13 Menu "Information" Operating view Main menu Information Parameters Description Serial No. Displays the serial number of the control unit Hardware Version Displays the present hardware version Software# Display of the present software number SW Version Displays the present software version Temperature Displays the current temperature in the control unit Table 54:Menu "Information" 10.14 Menu "Motor GW (Gateway) Operating View Main Menu�Motor GW(Gateway) Parameters Description Software# Displays the present software number SW version Displays the present software version Motor temperature Display of the current motor temperature Motor-SW Display of the present motor software Table 55:Menu "Motor GIN(Gateway)" .Mk. 142 5815,5001 US Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM Mmmorive Parameterising control unit Operating view Main menu Attachments Boom contact settings Parameters i Description Closing delay The parameters are only relevant in the following cases: The barrier is a"Swing Away"or"Auto Swing Away"design. In the"Close autom." parameter,the option is set to"Automatic". If a car drives against a"Swing Away"barrier arm, it snaps from the flange. In the"Swing Away"version,the barrier arm must be returned to the flange manually. In the"Auto Swing Away"version,the barrier arm automatically ` . moves -- -- _— position.When -— position , the barrier arm is locked in the flange by springs. After the barrier arm has caught again,the barrier closes after the time set | here. � | Setting range ' Factory setting los ^---'------------------------------------------------------------------ Table 52:Menu "Boom contact settings" 10'11'3 Boom locking The barrier can optionally ba equipped with ono|octm'moohunioo| b oom lock at the end of the barrier arm.When the barrier ioclosed, � the boom locking ia activated via the output function"Boom locking". |fa signal iu present for opening,the boom lock ia ro|0000d first. -+ Refer also to page 99, digital output function "Boom locking". Operating view Main menu Attachments-+Boom locking Parameters Description Without boom locking Boom locking not present. With boom locking Boom locking present. '---- Table 5l Menu "Boom locking" 10.12 Menu ,,Service,. This menu is only intended for K8AGNET|C'a service and only accessible with apassword. 5815.5O01US/Version U2.80 141 Barrier MHTMTM Micnorive MAGNMC ParameterisUng control unit 10.11'2 Boom contact settings The barrier can optionally bo equipped with a boom contact inthe flange. |n the'7oU^series, the boom contact iointegrated by default and performed aoa"Swing Away"or"Auto Swing Away' |--'Operating view Main menu Attachments-+Boom contact settings Parameters Description -' -'---- --- - --------------- --------------'-- --' -------- -'- - --' ` � Inactive/Active" " | The barrier can optionally»e equipped with m boom contact mu the flange. The | function "Boom contact settings"is used ho select the behaviour of the input ~ function "Boom contact input"and the output function "Boom contact FB^ The | i functions must bn selected. -+See page 97. chapter 0.4.0 and page 98. chapter 9.4.7. � | Options ' | � inactive ! { The"Boom contact"is inactive. If i i � / was selected, this output io deactivated once the boom contact triggers. � ! The input"Boom contact input"has no function in this option. | � uohvo / � ! The"Boom contact" is active |f^B�m��F�w��|��rU� � � o�p��vn��n. dhisoutpu�iodoactivotadonnotheboomoontuct triggers. If "Boom contact input"was selected for the input function, 24VDCare | pending at the input while the boom is resting in the flange. If the barrier i / arm the/ ' | contact"input. The barrier moves into the^opan^pooition� ' / � pootorymaftin0 | Inactive � � Automahodosing ' So|e�xigna|fordooingof�oban�rannafterboomno�aoo� . ! Options . i �V Automatic i / | � The barrier arm automatically closes after the end of the delay time. | � | � Signal ' ! For the barrier arm Vo close, a signal must bo applied 0o the input with the � � function "Cloaa'or"Close low priority/. . / Factory setting ! | � Automatic / 140 5815,5001 US Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGN EnC A#W Parameterising control unit Operating view Main menu Attachments Signal light Parameters Description Lead time In some application cases, it is required for reasons of safety that a warning signal for the following traffic lights up after before closing of the barrier.This warning signal must light up before the barrier closes.The warning signal is switched on with the closing signal and the lead time is started. The barrier closes only after the end of the set lead time With this parameter, you can also set the"Close delay"in the"Delays"menu. Setting range 0 to 15 s Factory setting 0s Start event Select the start event from when on the signal lights should be switch. Options Closing signal Safety loop active The option "Safety loop active" is only sensible for the automatic program modes 5 to 8. If an opening signal is pending,the signal lamps are not switched. Factory setting Closing signal POW Table 51:Menu "Signal light" 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 139 Barrier MHTMrmMicmonvo MAGNEnc Para00eterising control unit Aam Operating view Main menu-+Attachments Signal light Parameters Description Signal mode A Illumination strip red Barrier closed (lower end position): Red, permanent light Barrier opens: Red flashes at 2 Hz Barrier open (upper end position): Red off Barrier closes (without lead time)/ | ' Factory setting Illumination strip/ --- -- --- --'— -- -------- --'---------- ----- -- / Signal mode B Select function for output"Signal light B". iOptions | � i � -+ For the options"Traffic|ight". "Warning signo[ "Flashing Ughts^. "Boom iUuninaUon^. see parameters"signal mode A". � Illumination strip green � Barrier closed (lower end position): Green off � Barrier opens: Green off . | � Barrier open (upper end poohion): Green, permanent light � | � Barrier closes(without lead time)/ | � closing time(with lead Umo): Green off Factory setting A"^ Illumination strip green i-- '--- - -- --- �------------------- -'-------------------------- — ----- ' Signal mode C | Select function for output"Signal light C" Options | � Traffic light(permanent signal for red/green oigna| |ights): / Barrier closed: Traffic light red ' Barrier opens: | � / Barrier open (upper end poohion): Traffic light off Barrier closes (without lead time)/ | ' closing time (with lead timo): Traffic light red ! Warning signal (connection ofa visual or acoustic signal/ � permanent signal before and during closing of the banior): | � Barrier closed:Warning signal off � | � Barrier opens: Warning signal off ' m Barrier open (upper end pnoition): Warning signal off ! � Barrier closes (without lead Ume)/ ' closing time (with lead time): Warning signal red . | Factory setting Warning signal | 138 5815,5001 US Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M MAG EnC �°"'"°`" Parameterising control unit 10.11 Menu "Attachments" 10.11.1 Signal light The parameters"Signal mode A", "Signal mode B"and "Signal mode C'can be used to parameterise the function for the outputs "Signal light A", "Signal light B"and"Signal light C". -->See page 99, Table 28 You can connect three signal lights. If you want to control light strips via the MAGNETIC control unit, you need to select the"Illumination strip red"option for"Signal Mode A"and "Illumination strip green"for"Signal Mode B". Operating view Main menu Attachments-+Signal light Parameters Description Signal mode A Select function for output"Signal light A'. (continued on next page) The parameter"lead time"can be used to parameterise the warning lamp so that it already lights up red or flashes before closing.The lead time is the time between the closing signal and commencement of the closing procedure. Options Traffic light(permanent signal for red/green signal lights): Barrier closed: Traffic light red Barrier opens: Traffic light red Barrier open (upper end position): Traffic light off Barrier closes (without lead time)/ closing time (with lead time):Traffic light red Warning signal (connection of a visual or acoustic signal/ permanent signal before and during closing of the barrier): Barrier closed:Warning signal off ;N Barrier opens: Warning signal off Barrier open (upper end position): Warning signal off Barrier closes(without lead time)/ closing time (with lead time): Warning signal red Flashing light(flashing light connection/ flashing signal while the barrier opens or closes): Barrier closed: Flashing light off Barrier opens: Flashing light flashes at 2 Hz Barrier open (upper end position): Flashing light off Barrier closes(without lead time)/ closing time (with lead time): Flashing light flashes at 2 Hz Boom illumination (boom illumination connection/ permanent flashing signal except when the barrier is open): Barrier closed: Illumination flashes at 2 Hz Barrier opens: Illumination flashes at 2 Hz Barrier open (upper end position): Illumination off Barrier closes(without lead time)/ closing time (with lead time): Illumination flashes at 2 Hz 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 137 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGW Pararneterising control unit r Aff 10.10.10 Closure by light barrier Operating view Main menu-+Settings Closure by light barrier(fight barr.) Parameters 1 Description Closure by light barrier Use this parameter to select the closing behaviour for barriers with only one safety light barrier installed. If a safety loop is installed,the barrier closes only after the first vehicle has driven through in the automatic program modes 5 to 8. If only a safety light barrier is installed, the barrier will not close automatically after the first vehicle has driven through in the automatic program modes 5 to 8. Options Inactive In program modes 5 and 6, the barrier only closes if either a closing signal is applied or the hold-open time has passed. In program modes 7 and 8, the barrier only closes when a closing signal is applied. !j Active In program modes 5 to 8,the barrier closes at once when a vehicle drives through the safety light barrier. Factory setting Inactive Table 49:Menu "Closure by light barrier" 10.10.11 Master/Slave Operating view Main Menu-+Settings Master/Slave Parameters Description Master/Slave Activate and deactivate"Parallel operation"function. By activating the master/slave function,the corresponding inputs and outputs are automatically converted. —> For information on parallel operation, see separate instructions. Options inactive active Factory setting inactive Table 50:Menu WasterlSlave" 136 5815,5001 US Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M Enc Parameterising control unit 10.10.9 Power failure Operating view—>Main menu-+Setup Power failure Parameters Description Power failure This parameter sets whether the barrier arm opens at power outage or opens or closes depending on the barrier arm position. The balancing springs must be set according to the selected option. —>See page 82, chapter 8.13. Options Unlocked With this option, the lever system of the closed barrier is unlocked;the barrier remains closed. The boom can be opened manually. If the boom angle is less than approx.30°,the boom will close. If the barrier arm is above an angle of approx. 35°,the barrier arm opens.The ba- lancing springs in the lever system must be set accordingly. Open In this option,the barrier arm opens at power outage.The barrier arm is moved to the locked end position with the present residual energy of the mains unit and completely opened by the balancer springs of the lever system.The balancing springs must be set correctly and the barrier arm must not be kept in the closed position by external influence. If the power fails during closing,the barrier arm may reach the closed position and lock under certain circumstances.The residual mains adapter power is not sufficient to open the barrier again. Locked ` For this option, the barrier arm behaviour depends on the barrier arm position at power outage.When the barrier is closed, it remains closed and the lever system remains locked. Manual opening of the barrier is not possible or requires considerable application of force. If the barrier arm is below an angle of approx. 30°,the barrier arm closes. If the barrier arm is above an angle of approx. 35°, the barrier arm opens. The balancing springs in the lever system must be set accordingly. Factory setting Unlocked Table 48:Menu "Power failure" 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 135 Barrier MHTMTM Micnorive MAGNOC Para00eteKisUng control unit AM Operating view Main menu Settings Start-up behaviour(Start-up behay.) Option Description 6 Reference run In this option,the barrier arm stops initially. Release signal The barrier carries out a reference run after the left operating button on the control unit is pressed. Closing behaviour - - - - - ) | �V Program modes 1 or 2: | - } | The barrier closes at once when a permanent closing signal isapplied. | ! | � Program modes 3to8� Thoban�ro�oon��onoau�ordheban�rn»� | | | reference � 7 ! Reference run i ! � In this option,the barrier initially performs a reference run. This means that the i | barrier opens at low speed. | / Release signal � i | Non»�auo�gnod � mq��dhuo�ue�eboom | | | | Closing behaviour | ' � m Program modes 1 or 2: The barrier closes at once when u permanent closing signal isopp|iod | . � | � � Program modes 3ho8: ' Ifasafety loop is installed, the barrier closes only after the first vehicle has | ~ww%* � | driven through or after closing. If only a safety light barrier is installed,the | � barrier closes at once when the voltage returns. / | � � / | WARNING! | � Danger of injury from closing arm! � Visual contact Vo the barrier iu required when the closing � � signal isgiven. � | � Novoh��nmu��o�ndbo�w�ebon�rwhon�o � | | | ! closing signal isgivan� ' Table 4r Menu "Start-upbehaviour" 134 5815,5001 US Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive ` M""� Parameterising control unit Operating view->Main menu—+Settings-+Start-up behaviour(Start-up behay.) Option `, Description 4 � " " Reference run In this option,the barrier arm stops initially. The barrier will only carry out a reference run after a release signal. Release signal A release signal must be applied for the barrier to carry out a reference run. If the release signal is applied before return of voltage,the release signal is ineffective. In this case,the release signal must be revoked and applied again after the barrier opens. The release signal can be given by an external closing signal or by pushing the left operating button at the control unit. Closing behaviour Program modes 1 or 2: If a safety loop is installed,the barrier closes only after a vehicle has passed through and a permanent closing signal is pending. If only a safety light barrier is installed, no passage is required. The barrier closes at once when a permanent closing signal is applied. Program modes 3 to 8: If a safety loop is installed,the barrier closes only after the first vehicle has driven through. If only a safety light barrier is installed,the barrier closes at once when the voltage returns. * 5 Reference run In this option,the barrier arm stops initially. The barrier will only carry out a reference run after a release signal. Release signal A release signal must be applied for the barrier to carry out a reference run. The release signal can be applied even before the voltage returns.The release signal can be given by an external closing signal or by pushing the left operating button at the control unit. Closing behaviour Program modes 1 or 2: If a safety loop is installed,the barrier closes only after a vehicle has passed through and a permanent closing signal is pending. If only a safety light barrier is installed, no passage is required. The barrier closes at once when a permanent closing signal is applied. Program modes 3 to 8: If a safety loop is installed, the barrier closes only after the first vehicle has driven through. If only a safety light barrier is installed,the barrier closes at once when the voltage returns. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 133 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Parameterisin control unit Aff"�'" Operating view Main menu Settings Start-up behaviour(Start-up behay.) Option Description 2 Reference run In this option,the barrier initially performs a reference run. This means that the barrier opens completely at low speed. Release signal A release signal must be applied for the barrier to be ready fro closing. The release signal can be applied even before the voltage returns. The release signal can be given by an external closing signal or by pushing the left operating button at the control unit. Closing behaviour Program modes 1 or 2: If a safety loop is installed, the barrier closes only after a vehicle has passed through and a permanent closing signal is pending. If only a safety light barrier is installed, no passage is required. The barrier closes at once when a permanent closing signal is applied. Program modes 3 to 8: If a safety loop is installed,the barrier closes when the first vehicle has driven through. If only a safety light barrier is installed, the barrier closes at once when the voltage returns. 3 � , Reference run In this option,the barrier initially performs a reference run. This means that the barrier opens completely at low speed. *" Release signal A release signal must be applied for the barrier to be ready fro closing. If the release signal is applied before return of voltage,the release signal is ineffective. In this case, the release signal must be revoked and applied again after the barrier opens. The release signal can be given by an external closing signal or by pushing the left operating button at the control unit. Closing behaviour Program modes 1 or 2: If a safety loop is installed,the barrier closes only after a vehicle has passed through and a permanent closing signal is pending. If only a safety light barrier is installed, no passage is required. The barrier closes at once when a permanent closing signal is applied. Program modes 3 to 8: If a safety loop is installed, the barrier closes only after the first vehicle has driven through. If only a safety light barrier is installed, the barrier closes at once when the voltage returns. 132 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive / NEnc Z MAG ,,, - �" Parameterising control unit 10.10.8 Start-up behaviour Use this menu to select the start-up behaviour of the barrier according to the following events: after switching on voltage supply after return of voltage after reset You can select between 7 options:The default setting is option"1". NOTE! The display messages "Waiting for passage"and "Waiting for release"can be confirmed with the left button of the control unit. Ensure that no persons or vehicles are present below the barrier arm. In operating modes 3 to 8, the barrier will close as soon as the message has been confirmed. In operating modes 1 and 2, a closing signal is still required after the message is confirmed. Operating view Main menu Settings Start-up behaviour(Start-up behay.) Option Description 1 Reference run In this option,the barrier initially performs a reference run. This means that the barrier opens completely at low speed. Release signal No release signal is required to close the boom. Closing behaviour Program modes 1 or 2: If a safety loop is installed,the barrier closes only after a vehicle has passed through and a permanent closing signal is pending. If only a safety light barrier is installed, no passage is required. The barrier closes at once when a permanent closing signal is applied. Program modes 3 to 8: If a safety loop is installed,the barrier closes when the first vehicle has driven through. If only a safety light barrier is installed,the barrier closes at once when the voltage returns. Am%, 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 131 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Parameterising control unit E" 10.10.7 Impact settings Operating view->Main menu-+Setup->Impact settings Parameters Description Impact response Select the barrier arm's impact reaction if the control unit detects an impact. -4 Also see page 126, chapter 10.10.3, parameter"Impact detection". , Options Open After impact detection,the barrier arm is opened completely. Stop After impact detection, the barrier arm's closing movement is stopped. Safe stop After impact detection, the barrier arm's closing movement is first stopped and then slightly opened. Factory setting Open Impact delay After the control unit has recognized that, e.g., a vehicle roof was hit by the closing barrier arm, the control unit tries to close the barrier again after the set impact delay. Impact is possible if, e.g., a user tries to drive through the barrier without permission. The following conditions must be met for the barrier to close after the end of the impact delay: In the"Automatic closing"parameter, the option must beset to"Automatic". ''""' The safety devices, such as safety loop or safety light barrier, must be clear. This parameter corresponds to the parameter"Impact delay" in the"Delays" menu. Setting range 5to30s Factory setting 5s Automatic closing Select signal for closing of the barrier arm after impact detection. Options Automatic The barrier arm automatically closes after the end of the impact delay. Signal For the barrier arm to close, a signal must be applied to the input with the function "Close"or"Close low priority". Factory setting Signal Table 46:Menu "Impact settings" 130 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 M EnC Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGN ' Parameterising control unit Drive direction 2: "Opening loop 1 2 Safety loop" 4 3 5 Fig. 50: Program mode 5 with pulse storage, Passage in direction 2 1 Remote control, card reader, coin accepter, etc. 2 Barrier 3 Opening loop 4 Safety loop 5 Passage in direction 2 In direction 2, the opening loop is driven on first. The barrier opens. While the opening loop or safety loop is occupied,the barrier remains open. When the vehicle has left both loops will the barrier close. From drive direction 2, vend Count is not active. When the vehicle leaves the opening loop backwards,the barrier closes at one. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 129 Barrier MHTMT"'MicroDrive MAGNEM Parameterising control unit AM Drive direction 1: "Safety loop-> 1 2 Opening loop" 4 3 5 � Fig. 49: Program mode 5 with vend count, Passage in direction 1 1 Remote control, card reader, coin accepter, etc. 2 Barrier 3 Opening loop 4 Safety loop 5 Passage in direction 1 The barrier is opened from direction 1 "Safety loop Opening loop"with a pulse at the"Opening with vend count"pulse, e.g.with a card reader or coin accepter.At the same time, an internal vend count is incremented. After passage of the safety loop and the opening loop,the vend Count is decremented again.When the internal vend count reaches the value"0", the barrier is closed. Additionally, the vend count is set to the value"0"and the barrier closed in the following cases, depending on the settings for the "Vend count" parameter: The vehicle does not drive over the supervision facility within the set hold-open time. A closing signal is assigned. The barrier closes in the following cases: =_ If the vehicle drives over both loops in direction 1, the barrier closes as soon as the vehicle leaves the opening loop. The opening loop here acts as an extended safety loop. If a vehicle drives onto the safety loop but leaves it again backwards,the hold-open time is deleted and the barrier closes. If the vehicle drives over neither of the two loops, i.e.there is no drive through,the barrier closes depending on setting of the "vend count"parameter. 128 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGNEnC Parameterising control unit 10.10.6 Vend count Operating view Main menu Setup-4 Vend count Parameters Description Reset behaviour Use this parameter to set vend count reset behaviour. The function"Vend count" is available for program modes 4 to 8.An internal vend count counts the pulses present at the input with the"Opening with vend count"function. The pulses are decremented only in driving direction 1 "Safety loop Opening loop". Options No counter reset(without vend count reset) Time-out The vend count is set to the value"0"if the vehicle does not pass the supervision device within the set hold-open time. Reset on closing The vend count is set to value"0"when a closing signal is given. Time-out/Reset on closing The vend count is set to the value"0"if the event"Time-out"or the event "Reset on closing"occurs. Factory setting Time-out/Reset on closing Counter _._ This parameter shows the current counter reading of the vend count. Table 45:Menu"Vend count" Example vend count This mode is suitable for the automatic operation of a barrier, e.g. with program mode with card readers, remote control, coin accepters and induction "Automatic mode(5)" loops or light barriers. The control units and the barrier have a larger distance from each other. Instead of a hold-open time, an internal vend count is incremented and decremented. Passage of the barrier is possible in either direction. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 127 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGNM Parameterising control unit 10.10.3 Cut off angle Operating view Main menu Setup Cut off angle Parameters Description Safety loop close This parameter serves to ensure that a closed barrier can not be opened without authorisation. Where the barrier arm is below the set angle for"Safety loop close"during closing, signals of safety facilities like the safety loop or safety light barrier are ignored. Le., the barrier closes completely below the angle set here. Setting range Access: 1...40° Parking and Toll: 1...80° Factory setting 10° Light barrier Where the barrier arm is below the set angle for"Light barrier"during closing, the light barrier is ignored. I.e.,the barrier closes completely below the angle set here even if the light barrier is covered. Setting range 1 to 40° Factory setting 10° Impact detection Where the barrier arm is below the set angle for impact detection during closing, impact detection is deactivated. I.e., the barrier closes completely below the angle set here. Setting range 1 to 40° Factory setting 10° Table 44:Menu "Cutoff angle" 10.10.4 Inputs See page 97, chapter 9.4.6. 10.10.5 Outputs ` See page 99, chapter 9.4.7. 126 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGNENC Parameterising control unit Operating view Main menu Setup Delays Parameters Description Close delay The barrier only closes if the set time for the closing delay is over.The timer for closing delay is started with the closing signal. With this parameter, you can also set the"Lead time"in the"Signal light" menu. Setting range 0to15s Factory setting Os _ Light barrier delay The barrier only closes if the set time for the light barrier delay is over.The timer for light barrier delay is started with clearance of the light barrier. Setting range 0to15s Factory setting 5s Impact delay After the control unit has recognized that, e.g., a vehicle roof was hit by the closing barrier arm,the control unit tries to close the barrier again after the set impact delay. Impact is possible if, e.g., a user tries to drive through the barrier without permission. The following conditions must be met for the barrier to close after the end of the impact delay: In the"Impact Settings"menu, the parameter"Automatic closing"must be set to"Automatic". The safety devices, such as safety loop or safety light barrier, must be clear. -->Also see page 130, chapter 10.10.7, menu"Impact settings". Setting range p 5to30s Factory setting 5s Table 43:Menu'Delays" 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 125 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Parameterising control unit Eric 10.10 Menu "Setup" 10.10.1 Barrier speed Operating view Main menu Setup Barrier speed Parameters Description Close Select the closing speed for the barrier arm. The closing speed can be changed for all barrier types. The option"fast" corresponds to the barrier-specific speed (100 Options slow: approx. 50 %of the maximum speed medium: approx. 70% of the maximum speed fast: maximum speed (barrier-specific speed) Factory setting fast Open Select the opening speed for the barrier arm. The option "fast"corresponds to the barrier-specific speed (1100 The parameter is displayed for the following boom types:Access Pro,Access Pro L,Access Pro H,Access Select and Access Select L, Parking Pro and Parking Select. Options slow: approx. 50%of the maximum speed medium: approx. 70%of the maximum speed fast: maximum speed (barrier-specific speed) Factory setting fast Table 42:Menu "Barrier speed" 10.10.2 Delays Operating view Main menu Setup-->Delays Parameters Description Hold-open time The parameter"Hold-open time"sets the hold-open time for the automatic program modes 5 and 6. The hold-open time is started by an opening pulse by a control unit, such as a card reader.A passage should occur during the set hold-open time. If no passage occurs during the hold-open time,the barrier closes automatically. When the vehicle drives on the safety loop, the hold-open time is deleted. Setting range : 3to6Os Factory setting 30 s 124 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGM ' Parameterising control unit 10.8 Menu "Information" (i) Call and navigate 1. The operating view is displayed. ->See page 106, Fig.44. 2. Press left control button L. 3. Use the left control button i to scroll within the menu. 4. The"Information"menu is can be left as follows: Press the left control button i repeatedly until the operating view is displayed again or Press right control button 4*0 control button. Operating view—>Information Parameters = Description Error messages Shows the currently pending errors. If no error messages are present, the menu is not displayed. Inputs ' Displays the current settings for the digital inputs IN1 to IN8 Outputs Displays the current settings for the digital outputs D01 to D04 and the relay outputs N01 to NO3 and NO/NC4 to NO/NC6. Induction loops Displays the current frequencies of the connected induction loops. Detector(A-B), The first plug-in module is displayed as"Detector(A-B)". The second plug-in module Detector(C-D) is displayed as"Detector(C-D)".The frequencies of induction loops A and B are displayed directly.To display the frequencies for the induction loops C and D, you have to press the button''. Use the button+you can switch the view between "Detector(A-B)"and"Detector(C-D)". See page 143, chapter 10.15"Menu detector 1 (A-B)". Table 41:Menu'Information" 10.9 Program mode See page 112, chapter 10.7. AOW e 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 123 Barrier MHTMT"MicroDrive Parameterisin control unit � ` 9 t5pw2 ` 10.7.7 Mode "Service" In the"Service"mode, all opening and closing signals are ignored. The functions of safety devices like the safety loop or safety light barrier remain active for security reasons. This means that as soon as, e.g.,the safety loop is occupied,the barrier cannot be closed. Switch on Mode"Service " Switch the"Service"switch for the"Service"mode. The LED lights red. The display backlighting flashes. Switch off Mode "Service " After the service work, the switch"Service" must be switched.The LED must light green. O 1 2 a N Abb. 48:Service switch 1 Mode "Service"on 2 Mode "Service"off Button function In the"Service"mode, you can control the motor with the two middle control buttons. Middle left button `=_: Manually open the barrier. Middle right button4l": Manually close the barrier. 0 NOTE! For reasons of safety, the first barrier arm motion after switching between program mode and service mode is performed at slow speed. 122 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive ��°"'"°��" Parameterising control unit 10.7.6 Automatic Modes 5 to 8: Drive direction 2 In drive direction 2"Opening loop Safety loop",the automatic modes are identical. Closing boom EM WARNING! ' Danger from closing boom! A closing boom may cause severe or lethal injury to persons, bicyclers and cabriolet drivers! Therefore: — The maximum distance between opening loop and safety loop must be not greater than max. 3.28 ft(1 m). In direction 2"Opening loop--> Safety loop",the barrier closes as soon as the vehicle leaves the opening loop. This means, if the distance is too large,the barrier closes before the car has cleared the barrier. See page 50, chapter 7. Drive direction 2: "Opening loop—> 1 2 Safety loop" 4 5 Fig. 47:Program modes 5 to 8, Passage in direction 2 1 Remote control, card reader, coin accepter, etc. 2 Barrier 3 Opening loop 4 Safety loop 5 Passage in direction 2 In direction 2, the opening loop is driven on first. The barrier opens. While the opening loop or safety loop is occupied, the barrier remains open. When the vehicle has left both loops, the barrier closes. Hold-open time is not active in drive direction 2. When the vehicle leaves the opening loop backwards,the barrier closes at once. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 121 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGNM Parameterising control unit _fflm "`R°" Function From direction 1 "Safety loop—>Opening loop", the barrier is opened by an opening signal at one of the digital opening inputs. Hold-open time is not active in this mode. The barrier closes in the following cases: If the vehicle drives over both loops in direction 1 "Safety loop —> Opening loop",the barrier closes as soon as the vehicle leaves the safety loop. The opening loop here does not act as an extended safety loop. If a vehicle drives onto the safety loop but leaves it again backwards, the barrier closes. If the vehicle does not drive onto any of the two loops,the barrier remains open until a vehicle drives through or a closing signal is given. For barriers with a safety light barrier but no safety loop installed, see page 136, chapter 10.10.10. Modes 5 to 8: Input function ; Signal type Supported/ Automatic(5)to (8)— Not supported Supported input functions Open low priority Pulse or Supported permanent signal Open low priority with Pulse signal Supported vend count Open high priority Pulse or Supported permanent signal Opening loop � " — b Supported Close Pulse or � Supported permanent signal Table 40:Supported input functions'Automatic(5)to(8)" —+See page 97, chapter 9.4.6"Digital inputs". 120 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGN Parameterising control unit The barrier closes in the following cases: If the vehicle drives over both loops in direction 1 "Safety loop —4 Opening loop", the barrier closes as soon as the vehicle leaves the safety loop. The opening loop here does not act as an extended safety loop. If a vehicle drives onto the safety loop but leaves it again backwards, the barrier closes. If the vehicle drives over neither of the two loops, i.e.there is no drive through,the barrier closes after the end of the hold-open time. a For barriers with a safety light barrier but no safety loop installed, see page 136, chapter 10.10.10. Mode 7:Automatic(7) Typical application This mode is suitable for the automatic operation of a barrier, e.g. with ticket vending machines with internal logic. Passage of the barrier is possible in either direction Function From direction 1 "Safety loop—> Opening loop",the barrier is opened by an opening signal at one of the digital opening inputs. Hold-open time is not active in this mode. The barrier closes in the following cases: If the vehicle drives over both loops in direction 1, the barrier closes as soon as the vehicle leaves the opening loop. The opening loop here acts as an extended safety loop. If a vehicle drives onto the safety loop but leaves it again backwards, the barrier closes. If the vehicle does not drive onto any of the two loops,the barrier remains open until a vehicle drives through or a closing signal is given. For barriers with a safety light barrier but no safety loop installed, see page 136, chapter 10.10.10. Mode 8: Automatic (8) Typical application This mode is suitable for the automatic operation of a barrier, e.g. with ticket vending machines with internal logic. Passage of the barrier is possible in either direction. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 119 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Parameterising control unit AM "` Mode 5: Automatic (5) Typical application This mode is suitable for the automatic operation of a barrier, e.g. with card readers, remote control, coin accepters and induction loops or light barriers. Passage of the barrier is possible in either direction Function The barrier is opened from direction 1 "Safety loop-->Opening loop"with a pulse at the"Open low priority"pulse, e.g.with a card reader or coin accepter. The hold-open time that was set is also started. When the vehicle leaves the safety loop, the hold-open time is deleted. The barrier closes in the following cases: If the vehicle drives over both loops in direction 1,the barrier closes as soon as the vehicle leaves the opening loop. The opening loop here acts as an extended safety loop. �n If a vehicle drives onto the safety loop but leaves it again backwards,the barrier closes at once. If the vehicle drives over neither of the two loops, i.e. there is no drive through,the barrier closes after the end of the hold-open time. —� For barriers with a safety light barrier but no safety loop installed, see page 136, chapter 10.10.10. Mode 6:Automatic(6) Typical application This mode is suitable for the automatic operation of a barrier, e.g. with card readers, remote control, coin accepters and induction loops or light barriers. Passage of the barrier is possible in either direction. Function The barrier is opened from direction 1 "Safety loop—),Opening loop"with a pulse at the"Open low priority" pulse, e.g.with a card reader or coin accepter. The hold-open time that was set is also started. When the vehicle leaves the safety loop, the hold-open time is deleted. 118 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMT"MicroDrive M Menc Parameterising control unit 10.7.5 Automatic modes 5 to 8: Drive direction 1 — overview and differences The automatic modes differ in their functions in drive direction 1 "Safety loop-> Opening loop". In drive direction 2"Opening loop-> Safety loop",the automatic modes are identical. - See page 121, chapter 10.7.6. Drive direction 1: "Safety loop-> 1 2 Opening loop" A 0 4 3 5 Fig.46:Program modes 5 to 8, Passage in direction 1 1 Remote control, card reader, coin accepter, etc. 2 Barrier 3 Opening loop 4 Safety loop 5 Passage in direction 1 Program mode Hold-open time Function € Closing time I Closing time Opening loop i drive backwards ` without drive through Automatic(5) With hold-open The opening loop If a vehicle drives Barrier closes after time here acts as an onto the safety the end of the extended safety loop and leaves it opening time or at loop. again backwards, a closing signal. Automatic(6) The opening loop the barrier closes. does not act as an '. extended safety loop here. Automatic(7) Without hold-open The opening loop Barrier closes after time here acts as an drive-through of extended safety the next vehicle or loop. after the closing Automatic(8) The opening loop signal. does not act as an extended safety loop here. Table 39:Differences of automatic program modes 5 to 8, direction 1 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 117 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Parameterising control unit Aff�"` 10.7.4 Mode 4: Two-Pulse control (bistable) Typical application This mode is suitable for barriers on factory premises, etc.that are often frequented by vehicles.The barrier must be operated by a person. Function The barrier is opened and closed completely via two separate command units(signal). One pulse on the respective input is sufficient for opening or closing. The pulse must be present between 100 and 300 ms. The input function"Open high priority"is superordinated to the input function"Close".This means that while a closing signal is applied,the barrier can be opened by the signal"Open high priority". When the opening signal is removed, the barrier closes again at once after opening completely. Supported input functions Input function Signal type Supported/ Not supported Open low priority Pulse or Supported permanent signal Open low priority with Pulse signal Supported vend count Open high priority Pulse or Supported permanent signal Opening loop — Not supported 1 Close Pulse or Supported_ permanent signal Table 38:Supported input functions"Two-Pulse control' —>See page 97, chapter 9.4.6"Digital inputs". 116 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M MAGNOC °"'"°'. Parameterising control unit 10.7.3 Mode 3: Pulse control (bistable) Typical application This mode is suitable for barriers on factory premises, etc.that are little frequented by vehicles.The signal generator may be, e.g.a wireless button.The barrier must be operated by a person. Function The barrier is opened and closed by one command unit(pulse repetition). Every pulse changes the barrier's movement direction. The pulse must be present between 100 and 300 ms. 1. Signal: barrier opens 2. Signal: barrier closes 3. Signal: barrier opens etc. If another pulse is given during closing,the barrier opens. If another pulse is given during opening,the barrier opens completely and closes afterwards for reasons of safety. Supported input functions Input function Signal type ' Supported/ Not supported Open low priority Permanent signal Supported (opening and closing alternatingly), (priority 2) Open low priority with — Not supported vend count Open high priority Pulse or Supported (priority 1) permanent signal Opening loop Not supported Close — Not supported Table 37:Supported input functions"Pulse control" See page 97, chapter 9.4.6"Digital inputs". 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 115 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Parameterising control unitIl'""�"�" °` 10.7.2 Mode 2: Deadman Typical application This mode is suitable for barriers on parking places,factory premises, etc. The barrier must be operated by a person. Function The barrier is operated by two buttons. For opening the barrier,the button "open"must be pressed until the barrier is open all the way. For closing the barrier the button "close" must be pressed until the barrier is closed. If no button is pressed,the barrier stops. If the"close"button is then pressed,the barrier opens completely first for safety reasons and then closes. If the closing process is interrupted, only opening will be possible. A signal at the"Close"input would in this case open the barrier. If the"Close"signal is removed, the opening process is interrupted. If there is a pulse at the"Open high priority"input, the barrier opens completely. Supported input functions Input function Signal type Supported/ Not supported j Open low priority Permanent signal Supported (priority 3) Open low priority with — Not supported ..�, vend count Open high priority Pulse or Supported (priority 1) permanent signal Opening loop — Not supported Close Permanent signal Supported (priority 2) Table 36:Supported input functions "Deadman" See page 97, chapter 9.4.6"Digital inputs". 114 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MACMEM /VwrDON °�" Parameterising control unit 10.7.1 Mode 1: Maintained contact Typical application This mode is suitable for barriers that are integrated in a superordi- nated system like a plant, e.g.to control access to machines. In this mode, the barrier must be operated by an operator. Function The barrier is controlled only by one switch. When the switch is closed,the barrier closes. When the switch is opened, the barrier opens. Supported input functions Input function Signal type Supported/ Not supported Open low priority — Not supported Open low priority with — Not supported vend count Open high priority Pulse signal_ Supported (priority 1) Opening loop — _ w Not supported Close Permanent signal Supported (priority 2) Table 35:Supported input functions"Maintained contact' --> See page 97, chapter 9.4.6"Digital inputs". 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 113 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Parameterising control unit ff NEnc ° 10.7 Select program mode 8 program modes and the service mode are available for the MHTMTM MicroDrive barriers. Program modes 1 to 4 are manual modes. In the manual modes, the barrier must be closed manually after a drive through. Program modes 5 to 8 are automatic modes. In the automatic modes, the barrier closes again automatically after a vehicle drives through. Program Description .1..�� Maintained contact --- 2 � � Deadman 3 Pulse control (bistable) 4 Two-Pulse control (Open/Closed button (Factory setting) 5 Automatic(5): with hold-open time 6 Automatic(6): with hold-open time and decoupling of the opening loop at drive through in the opposite direction 7 Automatic(7): without hold-open time 8 Automatic(8) without hold-open time and decoupling of the opening loop at drive through in the opposite direction J� Service Table 34:Program modes Another program mode can be selected pursuant to chapter 10.5, page 110. NOTE! For reasons of safety, the first barrier arm motion after program mode change is performed at slow speed. 112 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive /WM Parameterising control unit 10.6 Parameterising values Example:Change hold-open time 1. The operating view is displayed. —>See page 106, Fig. 44. 2. Press right control button A. 3. The"Main menu"menu is displayed. 4. Select the menu "Setup"with the two middle buttons 5. Confirm selection with the right control button )Or. 6. Select the menu"Delays"with the two middle buttons 7. Press right control button V. 8. The"Hold-open time"parameter is highlighted with a dark background and therefore selected. If required, select the "Hold-open time"parameter with the two middle buttons , 9. Press right control button 1 . 10. The current hold-open time value is displayed.The cursor flashes on the first digit. 11. Use the middle buttons , +to set the desired digit. 12. Use the right button+to move the cursor to the right. 13. The cursor flashes on the second digit. 14. Use the middle buttons +, +to set the desired digit. 15. Press the right button♦. 16. Use the left button+0 to leave the"Hold-open time" parameter. 17. The safety prompt"Save changes?"appears. If the changes are to be saved, press the right button 1 . The new hold-open time is activated. If the changes are not to be saved, press the left button X. The previous hold-open time remains active. 18. The"Delays"menu is displayed. 19. Press the left button+3 repeatedly until the operating view is displayed again. 581 5,5001 US/Version 02.66 111 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Parameterising control unit Apm 10.5 Parameterising options Menu setup, refer to page 189. Program modes overview, refer to page 112. Example:Select program mode 1. The operating view is displayed. -*See page 106, Fig.44. 2. Press right control button.11. 3. The"Main menu"menu is displayed. 4. The"Program mode"menu is highlighted with a dark background and therefore selected. If required, select the "Program mode"menu with the two middle buttons '. 5. Confirm selection with the right control button Vf. 6. A list with the possible program modes is displayed. 7. Select the desired program mode with the two middle buttons 8. Use the right button V to select the new programming mode. Your selection is marked with the symbol LK 9. Use the left button 4'D to leave the"Program mode"menu. 10. The safety prompt"Save changes?"appears. If the changes are to be saved, press the right button 1 . The new program mode is activated. If the changes are not to be saved, press the left button X. The previous program mode remains active. 11. The"Main menu"menu is displayed. 12. Use the left button+0 to leave the"Main menu"menu. The operating view is displayed. 110 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive �Il '."_�Enc Parameterising control unit 10.4.3 Current program mode Symbols Description Current program mode, here program mode 4 —> For description of program modes, refer to page 112, chapter 10.7. Program mode"Service" —� For description of program mode"Service", refer to page 122, chapter 10.7.7. Table 31:Current program mode 10.4.4 Current state of the induction loops The induction loops can have the following states: Symbols - Description Loop A and B connected. The induction loop T function is OK. If the icon flashes,the loop is occupied. If another"detector" plug-in module is connected, these induction loops are marked "C and"D". r The induction loop assumes the function of the safety loop. See page 143, chapter 10.15. Reference is performed. © Induction loop deactivated. Induction loop defective. Table 32:Current state of the induction loops 10.4.5 Further symbols Symbols Description gTpp wrong password entered. Access denied. �=1 Reset values to factory settings. Enter the password "0000"for this. Table 33:Further symbols 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 109 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Parameterisin control unit Aff E°` 10.4.2 Current state of the barrier The barrier can have the following states: Symbols Description Barrier arm closed. Barrier arm open. Barrier arm opens. Closing signal was recognized. Traffic lights active. Barrier closes in 5 seconds. Time for traffic light lead is counted down. 5 r Barrier arm closes. Monitoring unit used. ■ Barrier arm position unknown. 1 "Homing"active. 4 Barrier arm stopped An error is present. Table 30:Current state of the barrier 108 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive ��°�" Parameterising control unit 10.4 Symbols in the display 10.4.1 Control button functions The control unit is equipped with 4 control buttons. The function of the control buttons change depending on the current view in the display. The current functions are displayed. Symbols Description Call menu"Information'. Scroll menu "Information". r: Call menu "Main menu"Make all settings in the menu"Main menu". Menu "Information"—�Menu"Detector": Perform reference of the induction loops. 4:1 ; Leave current menu level. The next higher menu level is displayed. Call next-lower menu level. = Select desired option or desired value. When the desired option was selected,the symbol LVJ is displayed. Option was selected but not yet stored LA __.._... _.. ...,.._._ w..,, .._ x... Within one menu level: Move cursor(market) upwards. For setting value: Increase figure. A Within one menu level: � �� Move cursor(market)downwards. For setting value: Decrease figure. . Move cursor one position to the right. Menu "Information"—� Menu"Detector", for plug-in module"Detector(C-D)": Call view "Detector(C-D)"and switch between"Detector (A-B)"and "Detector(C-D)". Program mode"Service": Manually open the barrier. Program mode"Service": Manually close the barrier. Delete error message. When changing settings: Cancel changing process. Table 29:Control button functions 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 107 Barrier MHTMT"MicroDrive Parameterising control unit Affm 10.3 Displays on the control unit Example"Operational view" 1 /2 3 li X71 IWW 4 _m N 1 6 5 4 Fig. 44:Example "Operational view" 1 Program mode, here program mode 4 2 Barrier type,here type Access Select' 3 Current state of the barrier, here barrier closed 4 Current function of the right control button, here calling menu"Main menu" 5 Current state of the induction loops 6 Current function of the left control button, here calling menu 'Information" Example"Screen change value" 1 2 Hold-open til e 60 3 15 Sek 4 3 4-j t a 5 Fig. 45:Example "View—Change value" I Parameter 2 Current value 3 Possible upper value 4 Possible lower value 5 Current functions control buttons 106 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MAGNEM MCM4ROV Parameterising control unit 10 Parameterising control unit 10.1 Safety -4 See also safety notes on page 20, chapter 2.6"Occupational safety and special dangers". Improper parameterisation WARNING! Risk of injury by improper parameterisation of • the control unit! Improper parameterisation of the control unit can lead to severe injuries! Therefore: - The parameterisation of the control unit may only be carried out by qualified personnel or professional electricians. - The electrical connection of the signal generators to the IN1 to IN8 inputs must fit the parameterisation. 10.2 Control elements control unit Control elements control unit MGC (Magnetic Gate Controller) og mode Affachments 2 3 MagO012la Fig.43:Control unit elements MGC 1 Menu 2 Current function of the 4 control buttons 3 Control buttons 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 105 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Electrical connection /WtM5PWROU' 9.5 Checking the electrical connection The following points have to be checked after the electrical installation of the barrier: Are the following electrical protective devices installed: 2-pole main switch, circuit breaker and ground fault circuit interrupter? Is the power cable connected to the terminal in compliance with chapter 9.3? Are the induction loops connected according to the wiring diagram? Are the safety light barriers connected according to the wiring diagram? Are the control lines connected according to wiring diagram? Have all barrier housing covers been properly assembled? 104 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MMUMMOV w Enc Electrical connection Function Description Direction 2 A=> B The vehicle drives from direction A to B. When the vehicle enters loop B, this output starts emitting a continuous signal. When the vehicle leaves loop B,this output stops the permanent signal. This function can be used, e.g.to control traffic lights. tj t t2 DO NO/NC A B ' m s Direction 2 B=>A The vehicle drives from direction B to A.When the vehicle enters loop A, this output starts emitting a continuous signal.When the vehicle leaves loop A,this output stops the permanent signal. This function can be used, e.g.to control traffic lights. tj t t2 DO NO/NC A ; B R i ♦_ is �_ � ' s , Module-Open prior This output function can be used to issue the command"Open high priority" of plug-in modules like"Ethernet"or"Radio". Module-Open This output function can be used to issue the command"Open"of plug-in modules like"Ethernet"or"Radio". Module-Close This output function can be used to issue the command"Close"of plug-in modules like"Ethernet"or"Radio". Table 28:Function "Digital outputs"and"Output relay" 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 103 Barrier MHTMT"MicroDrive Electrical connection A"M�` Function Description Direction 2 Pls B =>A The vehicle drives from direction B to A. When the vehicle drives on loop B in the direction of loop A,this output emits a counter pulse of 300 ms. t=300 ms DO NO/NC A ; B i �— 0*:.*—Z7 Direction 1 A=> B The vehicle drives from direction A to B. When the vehicle leaves loop A, this output starts emitting a permanent signal.When the vehicle leaves loop B,this output stops the permanent signal. This function can be used, e.g. to control traffic lights. t1 t t2 DO NO/NC A B ' Direction 1 B=>A The vehicle drives from direction B to A.When the vehicle leaves loop B, this output starts emitting a continuous signal.When the vehicle leaves loop A,this output stops the permanent signal. This function can be used, e.g.to control traffic lights. t2 t tj DO NO/NC A B m 102 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGNSC MOMMROV Electrical connection Function Description Loop active pulse B When a vehicle drives into loop B (rising flank), the output with this function emits a pulse. Loop inactive pulse A When a vehicle drives out of loop A (falling flank),the output with this function emits a pulse. Loop inactive pulse B When a vehicle drives out of loop B (falling flank),the output with this function emits a pulse. Direction 1 Pls A=> B The vehicle drives from direction A to B.When the vehicle leaves loop A in the direction of loop B, this output emits a counter pulse of 300 ms. t=300 ms DO - NO/NC A ; B Direction 1 Pls B =>A The vehicle drives from direction B to A. When the vehicle leaves loop B in the direction of loop A,this output emits a counter pulse of 300 ms. 300 ms DO NO/NC A B s Direction 2 Pls A=>B The vehicle drives from direction A to B. When the vehicle drives on loop A in the direction of loop B,this output emits a counter pulse of 300 ms. t= 300 ms DO NO/NC A B 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 101 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Electrical connection Jc Function i Description I Error When the control unit recognizes any"safety-relevant error'or 'error", the output with this function is reactivated (Fail safe). Warning When the control unit recognizes any"Warning",the output with this function is reactivated (Fail safe). Closed _ When the barrier is closed, the output with this function is active. Open When the barrier is open, the output with this function is active. Closing _ While the barrier closes,the output with this function is active. Opening While the barrier opens,the output with this function is active. Boom angle This function is used to set the upper and lower angles. When the barrier arm is within this angle range, the output with this function is active.When the barrier arm is outside of the angle range set, the output is inactive. The upper and lower angle can be set for values between 0°and 90°. Pulse after passage When a passage was detected, this output emits a counter pulse of 300 ms with this function. Passage is possible in either direction. Sliding door pulse This output is used to control a sliding gate. When the barrier is open,the output with this function emits a counter pulse of 300 ms with this function. Boom contact FB The barrier can optionally be equipped with a boom contact in the flange. (Boom contact feedback) i When the boom contact triggers,the output with this function is deactivated (fail safe). The output is activated again once the boom contact is re- established and the boom is opened again entirely.. Boom locking The barrier can optionally be equipped with a boom lock. This output serves control of the electro-mechanical boom lock at the end of the barrier arm. When the barrier is closed,the boom lock is activated via this output. If a signal is present for opening, the boom lock is removed first. The barrier opens with a short delay. The parameter"With boom locking" must be activated in the menu "Boom locking". —.See page 141, chapter 10.11.3. Parallel operation This output can be used to operate two barriers synchronously. This output function must be activated via the menu"Master/Slave". —).See page 136, chapter 10.10.11. For information on parallel operation, see separate instructions. Acknowledgment This output is required for parallel operation. For information on parallel operation, see separate instructions. Signal light A This output is used to control a signal light. The function of this output can be parameterised via the parameter"Signal light A", page 137, chapter 10.11.1. Signal light B This output is used to control a signal light. The function of this output can be parameterised via the parameter"Signal light B", page 137, chapter 10.11.1. Signal light C This output is used to control a signal light. The function of this output can be parameterised via the parameter"Signal light C", page 137, chapter Loop active A When the induction loop A is busy, the output with this function is active. Loop active B When the induction loop B is busy, the output with this function is active. Loop active pulse A When a vehicle drives into loop A (rising flank), the output with this function emits a pulse. 100 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGNETIC ,. Electrical connection Function i Description Safety device The barrier can no longer be closed when+0 V DC are applied to this input. If the barrier is just closing when the input signal changes to 0 V and the cut off angle has not been undercut yet,the barrier will open again. This input must only be used in addition to the internal detector module or/and the safety light barriers connected to clamp X11. Only the internal safety devices are monitored. Acknowledgement This input is required for parallel operation. > For more information on parallel operation, see separate instructions. 1) The parameter is only sensible for the automatic program modes 5 to 8. Table 26:Function 'Digital inputs" 9.4.7 Digital outputs and output relays Technical data —>See page 41,chapter 4.5. NOTE! The digital output functions can be freely parameterised for the following versions: — Access Pro,Access Pro L, Access Pro H, Access Select and Access Select L — Parking Pro and Parking Select For the remaining versions, the outputs are firmly assigned. ,For output parameterisation, refer to page 105, chapter 10. Factory setting Clamp Description Function D01 Digital output 1 Boom release FB (Boom release feedback) D02 Digital output 2 Pulse after passage D03 Digital output 3 Signal light A D04 Digital output 4 w Signal light B N01 Relay 1 Open NO2 Relay 2 Closed ry�� ` NO3 _ Relay 3 _Error N04/NC4 Relay 4 Loop active A N05/NC5 Relay 5 Loop active B N06/NC6 Relay 6 Signal light C Table 27:Factory settings'Digital outputs"and'Relay outputs" 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 99 Barrier MHTMT""MicroDrive J MAGNMC Electrical connection I The functions have different priorities towards each other. The function "Open high priority"has the highest priority(priority 1). Le. all other functions, such as"Open low priority", "Close", etc. are ignored if the function "Open high priority"is active. Function Description Open high priority Connect fire fighter switch, emergency opening contacts, etc.to this input. This input has the highest priority. The barrier opens when +24 V DC are applied to this input. While the signal is present,the barrier cannot be closed. This input must not be used for opening loops.This input has prio- rity over all other input functions. Open low priority Depending on program mode, a permanent signal or pulse is required. Program modes Program modes 2,4 to 8: 2, 4 to 8: The barrier opens when +24 V DC are applied to this input. Open low priority X Program mode 3: Program mode 3: The barrier changes its state with every pulse, i.e.the barrier closes or Close/Open opens. Open exit function is used for selective counting, e.g.for permanent renters of a parking space. Opening with An internal vend count counts the pulses present at this input. The pulse vend count be present for approx. 100 to 300 ms. The reset behaviour of the vend count can be set by the"Reset behaviour"parameter. Close Depending on program mode, a permanent signal or pulse is required. The barrier closes when+24 V DC are applied to this input. A. Close low priority The function "Close low priority"is subordinated to all opening functions. The barrier closes when+24 V DC are applied to this input. Inhibit opening loop When +24 V DC are applied to this input, all opening commands except for the"Open high priority"and"Open exit"signals are ignored. This input function has no function in the program mode 1 to 4. Inhibit signal light Signal lights are no longer controlled when +24 V DC are applied to this input. External opening loop The barrier opens when +24 V DC are applied to this input. Connect entry opening loops to this input. External opening loop The barrier opens when +24 V DC are applied to this input. Connect exit opening loops to this input. External impact detection You can install external impact detection to the barrier arm. While no vehicle touches the barrier arm from below, the input"External impact detection"has+24 V DC applied.When the barrier arm impacts a vehicle, e.g. due to impermissible driving through of a vehicle,the+24 V DC are removed from the input"External impact detection". The barrier's behaviour in case of impact detection can be set in the"Impact settings"menu. � See page 130, chapter 10.10.7. Boom contact input The barrier is equipped with a boom release input in the flange.While the barrier arm is in its correct position, +24 V DC are applied to the"Boom contact input"input. When the barrier arm is moved from its position e.g. by a collision with a vehicle, the+24 V DC are removed from the"Boom contact input"input. The barrier moves into the"open"position. The boom contact must be activated in the menu "Boom contact settings". See page 140, chapter 10.11.2 _ A"W** 98 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive /PM Enc „ Electrical connection 9.4.6 Digital inputs Improper parameterisation , WARNING! Risk of injury by improper parameterisation of • the control unit! Improper parameterisation of the control unit can lead to severe injuries! Therefore: — The parameterisation of the control unit may only be carried out by qualified personnel. — The electrical connection of the signal generators to the IN1 to IN8 inputs must fit the parameterisation. Technical data See page 41, chapter 4.5. NOTE! The digital input functions can be freely parameterised for the following versions: — Access Pro,Access Pro L,Access Pro H, Access Select and Access Select L — Parking Pro and Parking Select For the remaining versions, the inputs are firmly assigned. —*For output parameterisation, refer to page 105, chapter 10. Factory setting Clamp i Description Function IN1 Input 1 Open low priority IN2 Input 2 Open low priority IN3 Input _ k ,�Opening with �� vend count IN4 Input 4 Open high priority IN5 Input 5 External opening loop exit IN6 Input 6 Close IN7 Input 7 i Close IN8 Input 8 Boom contact input Table 25:Factory settings'Digital inputs" 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 97 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Electrical connection MAGNEnc 0 NOTE! If four induction loops must be supervised, you can connect another plug-in module with the 'Detector" function into the control unit. This plug-in module registers as Detector 2(C-D)". To prevent mutual interference between the induction loops, we re- commend using a plug-in module instead of an external detector. 9.4.4 Connect and test the safety light barriers Connecting safety light Connect the transmitter and receiver connection lines of the safety barrier light barriers to clamps X11 and X20. By default, MAGNETIC installs a jumper between terminals X11 OUT and IN. When a safety light barrier is connected,the jumper must be removed. ->See page 181, chapter 18.1 "Wiring diagrams". Aligning the safety light barrier The receiver is mounted at the post and the transmitter at the barrier housing. 1. There must not be any objects between the transmitter and receiver. The light path must be free. 2. Switch on power supply. 3. The green LEDs at the transmitter and receiver must be lit. 4. Align receiver with transmitter. The yellow LED at the receiver lights up when aligned correctly. 5. Slightly loosen the attachment screws from the post to align the receiver. It must be possible to turn the post. 6. Turn the post, until the yellow LED at the receiver is lit. Check safety light barrier function Perform function test by holding an object into the light path between the transmitter and receiver. The following items must be met: The yellow LED at the receiver must go out. The barrier cannot be closed. 9.4.5 Connecting emergency opening contacts Fire-fighter switch, emergency opening contacts, etc. are connected to the"Open high priority"input. When the signal is applied to this input,the barrier opens.While the signal is present, the barrier cannot be closed. ->See page 91, chapter 9.4.6"Digital inputs"and page 181, chapter 18.1 "Wiring diagrams". 96 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive /R."En` Electrical connection NOTE! The input function "Safety devices"must only be used for additional safety devices. The input function is not considered for the plausibility check.A safety loop always has to be connected to the detector module or a testable safety light barrier to the clamps X11 and X20. 9.4.3 Connecting safety loop The safety loop is connected to the plug-in module"Detector 1 (A- B)",clamps A or clamps B. --->See page 181, chapter 18.1 "Wiring diagrams". The clamp function parameters can be set in the menu "Detector 1 (A-B)"with the parameters"Mode A"or"Mode B". -4 See page 143, chapter 10.15. 1 ------------� Al a I Al ' 1 Al A2 61 82 � A B 2 1 B A 3 4 Fig.42: Connecting safety loop 1 Control unit 2 Connection of induction loop A 3 Plug-in module 'Detector 1(A-B)" 4 Connection of induction loop B A Induction loop A B Induction loop B 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 95 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive AffH�ric Electrical connection 0 1 2 3 4 5 Fig. 41:Connecting the control lines 1 Cable opening rear 2 Control unit 3 Cable tie metal tabs 4 Cable opening front 5 Cable clamps 9.4.1 Connecting safety devices As safety devices,you must connect safety loops or safety light barriers to the control unit. Safety loops must only be connected to monitor vehicles. Only MAGNETIC safety light barriers must be used. " * If you connect a safety loop,the barrier closes only after the safety loop is clear. If you connect a safety light barrier, the barrier closes only after the safety light barrier is clear. The danger area of 2 ft(610 mm) as defined in chapter 2.7 must be maintained at any time, even in case additional safety devices are installed. 9.4.2 Plausibility check of the safety devices To prevent the barrier from being operated without safety devices, a plausibility check of the safety devices is performed. The plausibility check inspects whether at least one safety device is present and whether the safety device works correctly in operation. When the voltage supply is switched on, it is verified that at least one safety device was passed by a vehicle within three barrier openings. In operation,the number is increased to ten barrier openings. If the plausibility check fails, the barrier is decommissioned for reasons of safety. The message"Safety device missing"appears on the display. AW 94 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGNEnc /PoMMMROV Electrical connection Connecting mains supply JkI2 3 4 Fig.40:Connecting the mains supply 1 Terminal clamps for mains supply 2 Phase L 3 Neutral conductor N 4 Ground conductor PE 9.4 Connect customer's control lines (signalling devices) The following connections are available for control and feedback on customer's side: 4 8 Digital inputs for controlling the barrier. 4 Digital outputs to feed back information. 6 Relays outputs to feed back information. 3 Relays are normally-open contacts (NO) and 3 relays are change-over contacts. DANGER! Mortal danger by electric voltage! i 1. Disconnect barrier system supply voltage. Ensure that there is no voltage applied. Secure against reactivation. Connecting the control lines 2. Guide control lines into the connection space through the cable openings. Place control lines properly in the barrier housing. The control lines must not get into moving components. Attach control lines clamps and cable ties. The clamps can be removed from the rail by slight compression and relocated in the desired position.The cable ties can be attached to the metal tabs. 3. Connect control lines according to wiring diagram. Control lines must be wired so that no damage could occur due to moving parts. See page 181, chapter 18.1 "Wiring diagrams". 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 93 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Electrical connection fiqe_1_15� AOWAk DANGER! Mortal danger by electric voltage! i 1. Disconnect barrier system power supply. Ensure that the system is powered down. Secure against reactivation. Strip-off cable and core insulation— 2. Strip-off mains supply and cores according to the following preparation of the wiring figure. X31 o�g lad 1 20 2 3 �•�8 (3p) Q3j S Fig. 38: Strip-off the mains supply Dimensions in inch or feet are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis 1 Phase 2 Neutral conductor 3 Ground conductor ` Mains supply placement 3. Connect mains supply to the provided terminal clamps (X1: UN/PE)of the barrier housing according to the following figures. --> See also page 181, chapter 18.1. Place mains supply properly in the barrier housing. The line must be wired so that no damage could occur due to moving parts. Attach mains supply to the metal tabs via 2 cable ties. o 3 s 1 2 Fig. 39:Mains supply placement 1 Mains supply 2 Cable tie 3 Cable tie metal tabs 92 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive CMMICI`* Electrical connection 9.2 Installing electrical protective devices The safety installations that are required according to regional and local regulations must be provided by the customer. Usually these are: Ground fault circuit interrupter(GFCI) Circuit-breaker Appropriate listed 2-pole main switch. 9.3 Connecting the mains supply Electrical voltage ! DANGER! DANGER! Danger to life from electric shock! ii If the mains supply is not connected to the terminal clamps correctly, loosens from the terminal clamps and touches the housing or door,there is a direct danger to life from electric shock. Therefore: — Have work at the electrical system only performed by electricians. — Connect mains supply according to the following description. — Install electrical protective devices according to chapter 9.2, national and local codes. — Perform proper grounding. NOTE! The wire cross-section of the mains line must be between 16 and 12 AWG(1.5 and 4 mm 2). Observe national provisions on line length and associated cable cross-section. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 91 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Electrical connection AMP"E"` Hot surfaces A CAUTION! S)) Danger of burns! The motor surface may be hot. Touching this hot surface can lead to burns. Therefore: — Do not touch these hot surfaces. — After switching off the power supply wait some minutes until the motor has cooled down. — Wear protective gloves if necessary. Electromagnetic interference NOTICE! Electromagnetic interferences may cause malfunctions of the barrier or adjacent devices! The barrier is approved for industrial, residential, commercial and business use. Operation in other electro-magnetic environmental conditions may cause interferences or malfunctions. Therefore: Aw^t — Place control lines and mains cables into separate conduits — Use cables according to the electrical circuit plan. — Only install and apply additional parts approved by MAGNETIC. — The electrical and electronically additional parts must be EMC verified and must not exceed the indicated EMC limits. Personal protective equipment The following must be worn during all installation work: Work clothes I Protective gloves -- Safety shoes Protective helmet. 90 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M E11C Amok ^ ' Electrical connection Electric voltage ! DANGER! DANGER! Mortal danger by electric voltage! Touching live parts can be lethal. Damage to the insulation or to individual compo- nents can be lethal. Therefore: — Switch off the power supply immediately in case of damage to the insulation and arrange repair. — Only electrical specialists may carry out work on the electrical system. — Switch off power supply and secure against reactivation before performing any work.Test for absence of voltage! — Never bypass or deactivate fuses. — When replacing fuses observe the correct amperage specification. — Keep moisture and dust away from live parts. Moisture or dust may cause a short circuit. If the electrical connection is established during precipitation, e.g. rain or snow, penetration of moisture must be prevented by suitable measures, such as a protective cover. General WARNING! Danger by inappropriate installation! Inappropriate installation can result in severe and lethal injuries. Therefore: • — Only electrical specialists must perform any electrical installation tasks. — Pay attention to tidiness and cleanness at the assembly site! Loosely stacked or lying around components and tools are accident sources. — Tighten all screws correctly. 40r* 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 89 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Electrical connection AM NEnC 9 Electrical connection 9.1 Safety See also safety notes on page 20, chapter 2.6"Occupational safety and special dangers". Electric voltage— A DANGER! inadequate qualification DANGER! j{ Mortal danger by electric voltage! i Risk of injury in case of inadequate qualification! Therefore: — Only electrical specialists may carry out work on the electrical system. Electrical specialists are able, due to their technical training, knowledge and experiences as well as knowledge of the relevant standards and regulations, to execute tasks on electrical systems and to independently recognize possible hazards. In Germany,the electrical specialist must comply with the provisions of accident ..w� prevention regulation BGV A3(e.g. master electrical fitter).Appropriate regulations apply in other countries. The regulations valid there must be observed. The installation is to be made by a professional installer according to NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and Local Code. 88 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive NEM MAGOMMIROV Assembly and installation 8.15 Installing warning signs Warning signs for the barrier A minimum of two warning signs have be installed, one on each side of the barrier where easily visible.Two warning signs for the barrier are part of delivery. AUTOS/TRUCKS ONLY i b Fig.36:Apply prohibition signs, shown here for barrier type Access/Parking" Warning signs for the barrier arm A minimum of two warning signs have be installed, one on each side of the barrier where easily visible.Two warning signs for the barrier arm are part of delivery. P Fig.37: Warning signs for each side of the barrier arm 8.16 Check assembly and installation The following points must be checked after assembly and installation of the barrier: Are all foundation anchors firmly fixed? Are all screws firmly tightened Have all barrier housing covers been properly assembled? Are the warning signs installed? 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 87 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation fiff.ETIC 8.14 Align barrier housing and light barrier post Falling components a 7Risk ARNING! NNW of injury from falling components! alling components such as the barrier housing can cause severe injury! Therefore: — When aligning the barrier housing and light barrier post, loosen the attachment screws only slightly. — Tighten the attachment screws again after alignment. Alignment conditions Transmitter and receiver of the light barrier must be aligned with for light barrier each other for an object to be securely detected. For final alignment,transmitter and receiver must be electrically connected. —>See page 96, chapter 9.4.4. 1. Slightly loosen the barrier housing and post attachment screws. 2. Align barrier housing and post with each other. 3. Tighten the barrier housing and post attachment screws again. 4. Seal barrier housing with a silicon sealant according to page 67, Fig. 22. 86 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive 1 AGNEnC .. Assembly and installation The following overview tables apply for barriers with MicroBoom. Line width Number springs weak Number springs strong 4.9 to 6.6ft(1.5to2.0 m) 1 — 6.9to8.2ft(2.1 to 2.5 m) 2 — 8.5to10.2ft(2.6to3.1 m) 3 — 10.5to11.8ft(3.2to3.6m) 4 — 12.1 to 13.1 ft(3.7 to 4.0 m) 5 13.5 to 14.4ft(4.1 to 4.4 m) 6 — 14.8to15.4ft(4.5to4.7m) 7 — 15.8to16.7ft(4.8to5.1 m) 8 — 17.1to17.7ft(5.2to5.4m) 9 — 18.1 ft(5.5 m) 5 2 18.4 to 19.4ft(5.6to5.9m) 5 3 _._ _.._ _ 19.7ft(6.0 m) 6 3 Table 23:Overview table balancing springs for MicroBoom Line width Number springs weak Number springs strong 11 5 t 12.5ft(35to3.8m) 6 — 12.8to13.1ft(3.9to4.0 m) 7 — 13.5to14.8ft(4.1to4.5m) 8 — 15.1to16.7ft(4.6to4.8m) 9 — 16.1 ft(4.9 m) 5 2 16.4 to 17.7ft(5.0 to5.4m) 5 3 18.1 to 18.7 ft(5.5 to 5.7 m) 6 3 19.1 to 19.4ft(5.8to5.9m) 5 4 19.7ft(6.0 m) 4 5 Table 24:Overview table balancing springs for MicroBoom with pendulum support 4d 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 85 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation Aff En" Adjust balancing springs: 5. Remove the barrier housing hood. 6. Remove the rear barrier housing door. 7. Adjust springs with a wrench via the screws with locknuts. Barrier arm angle>approx. 30°: This balancing springs are tightened too far. Barrier arm angle<approx. 30°: This balancing springs are not tightened enough. 8. Install the barrier housing door. 9. Attach and lock the barrier housing hood. 8.13.2 Overview table balancing springs The following overview tables apply for barriers with VarioBoom. Line width Number springs weak Number springs strong 4.9 to 5.6 ft(1.5 to 1.7 m) 1 - 5.9to7.6ft(1.8to2.3m) 2 7.9 to 9.5 ft(2.4 to 2.9 m) 3 - 9.8to11.2ft (3.0to3.4m) 4 - 11.5to12.8ft(3.5to3.9m) 5 - 13.1 to 14.1 ft(4.0 to 4.3 m) 6 - 14.4to15.1ft(4.4to4.6m) 7 _ 15.4 to 16.4 ft(4.7 to 5.0 m) 8 _ 16.7 to 17.4 ft(5.1 to 5.3 m) 9 _ 17.7ft(5.4m) 5 2 18.1 to 19.0 ft(5.5 to 5.8 m) 5 3 19.4 to 19.7 ft(5.9 to 6.0 m) 6 3 Table 21:Overview table balancing springs for VarioBoom without pendulum support _ Line width Number springs weak Number springs strong 11.5 to 11.8 ft(3.5 to 3.6 m) 6 - 12.1to12.8ft(3.7to3.9m) 7 _ 13.1 to 14.4 ft(4.0 to 4.4 m) 8 _ 14.8 to 15.4 ft(4.5 to 4.7 m) 9 - 15.8 ft(4.8 m) 5 2 16.1 to 17.4 ft(4.9 to 5.3 m) 5._ 3 �. 17.7 to 18.4ft(5.4to5.6m) 6 3 18.7 to 19.0 ft(5.7 to 5.8 m) 5 4 19.4 to 19.7 ft (5.9 to 6.0 m) 4 5 Table 22:Overview table balancing springs for VarioBoom with pendulum support 84 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive ""6Nfl1 Assembly and installation 1 0 2 0 3 Fig. 35: Balancing springs in the lever system. 1 Barrier arm 2 Balancing spring 3 Screw with locknuts 8.13.1 Setting balancing springs Check and adjust balancing Check balancing springs with the motor warm from operation. springs 1. Secure barrier danger area e.g.with barrier tape. WARNING! Danger of crushing between barrier arm and barrier housing! 2. Switch off power supply. Ensure that the system is powered down. Secure against reactivation. 3. Place barrier arm in the 30° position manually. If required, push straight through the upper tool bore with a tool to press the lever arm from the dead point. -->See page 168, chapter 13.5. 4. Let go of barrier arm. If the barrier arm stays in the 30° position, the balancing springs are set correctly. If the barrier arm does not stay in the 30° position, the balancing springs must be adjusted. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 83 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation AM Enc C�� 8.13 Check and set the balancing springs in the lever system Danger of crushing, lever system I= loom WARNING! Danger of crushing at opened barrier housing at the lever system! The lever system in the barrier housing can cause serious crushing injuries! Therefore: - Balancing springs in the lever system must only be checked and adjusted by specialised personnel. - Balancing springs must only be checked and adjusted with the power supply turned off - Wear protective gloves if necessary. The lever system has balancing springs that exactly balance the barrier arm weight. These balancing springs are pre-set in the factory. The precise setting must be performed after assembly of the barrier arm and before commissioning. The lever force is determined not only by the spring tension but also by the number of springs used and the spring rate. MAGNETIC uses two spring types. Depending on application case, you will have to set the spring tension, remove the springs, use additional springs or use springs with a different spring rate. ->Also see page 84, chapter 8.13.2. In the"Power behaviour"menu, you can set the barrier behaviour in case of voltage failure. ->See page 135, chapter 10.10.9.The settings in this menu do not influence the settings of the balancing springs. 82 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGNEnC ,. Assembly and installation 26. Switch the"Service"switch on the control unit.The LED lights red.The display backlighting flashes. —> See page 122, chapter 10.7.7 Mode"Service". 27. Close the barrier with the middle right button 41"at the control unit. 28. Check the horizontal alignment of the barrier arm with a level and correct with the hexagon socket screws at the flange if necessary. 29. Switch the"Service"switch on the control unit.The LED must light green. 30. Switch off power supply. 31. Install the barrier housing door. 32. Attach and lock the barrier housing hood. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 81 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation Aff Err 10. Unhook the balancing springs in the lever system. For this, press a tool straight through the upper tool bore. The lever arm is pressed from the upper dead point. —>See page 168, chapter 13.5. 11. Remove the flange shaft cover disc of the barrier housing. Push a long rod through the flange shaft for this and slightly push it against the cover. 12. Push the flange shaft to the other side by turning. The flange shaft must be flush with the counter bearing on the side where the barrier is not mounted. The flange shaft points out of the barrier housing by approx. 2.44 in (62 mm)on the other side. 13. Tighten the two hexagon socket screws of the clamping lever at the flange shaft. Use a torque wrench with hexagon socket: 10 AF Tightening torque: 88.508 Ibf ft(120 Nm) 14. Hook in the balancing springs in the lever system. 15. Slip the v-ring over the flange shaft.The sealing lip points towards the barrier housing. —>See also page 79, Fig. 33. 16. Remove flange from the barrier arm. For this, loosen the 4 hexagon socket screws 5 AF at the barrier arm. 17. Attach the flange on the other side of the barrier arm. Observe position of the two slot nuts. The shorter protrusion of the flange must point towards the barrier arm end. ->See also page 74, Fig. 27. Use a torque wrench with hexagon socket: 5 AF Tightening torque: 11.801 Ibf ft(16 Nm) 18. Push barrier arm with pre-assembled flange onto the flange shaft. 19. Align barrier arm vertically. 20. Install the flange on the flange shaft using the 4 hexagon socket screws. To tighten the screws evenly. 0 Use a torque wrench with hexagon socket: 10 AF Tightening torque: 55.318 Ibf ft(75 Nm) 21. Close screws and threaded bores with the included grey plastic covers. 22. Insert the cover disc for the flange shaft. 23. Push the barrier into the top-most position. The clamping lever must be at the stop for the'open"position. If required, push straight through the upper tool bore with a tool to press the lever arm from the dead point. -->See page 168, chapter 13.5. 24. Check the vertical alignment of the barrier arm with a level and correct with the hexagon socket screws at the flange if necessary. 25. Switch on power supply. 80 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive /PZ.-Enc ° Assembly and installation C 0 Fig.32:Disassemble flange with barrier arm 8. Remove the v-ring from the flange shaft. Fig. 33:Remove the v-ring 9. Slightly loosen the two hexagon socket screws 10 AF of the clamping lever at the flange shaft. Do not remove the hexagon socket screws. Fig.34:Loosen hexagon socket screws at the clamping lever 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 79 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation AM Enc moo` 8.12 Conversion "left version" — "right version" (VarioBoom and MicroBoom) Danger of injury A CAUTION! Danger of injury! There is a danger of injury when mounting the barrier arm. Therefore: — Barrier arm as of a length of 14.8 ft(4.5 m) must be installed by two persons. We recommend also installing shorter barrier arms with two persons. Do not grease NOTICE! Improper lubrication of components, in particular the counter bearing or flange shaft, 7 may lead to damage of the equipment! Therefore: Do not grease the counter bearing and flange shaft. All MHTMTM MicroDrive barriers are available as"left version"and "right version". —>See type code, page 30 and as of page 31, Fig. 3 to Fig. 6. If required, you can also remove the barrier arm yourself from one side of the barrier housing and replace it on the other. 1. Secure barrier danger area e.g.with barrier tape. 2. Remove the barrier housing hood. 3. Remove the barrier housing door. WARNING! Danger of crushing between barrier arm and barrier housing! 4. Switch off power supply. Ensure that the system is powered down. Secure against reactivation. The balancing springs in the lever system are relaxed (boom raised). 5. The barrier must be open. Open barrier arm manually if required. 6. Disassemble flange from the flange shaft together with the barrier arm. For this, loosen the 4 hexagon socket screws 10 AF at the flange. 7. Remove the flange with the barrier arm. An**. 78 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGN Assembly and installation 9. Push the barrier into the top-most position.The clamping lever must be at the stop for the'open"position. If required, push straight through the upper tool bore with a tool to press the lever arm from the dead point. -->See page 168, chapter 13.5. 10. Check the vertical alignment of the barrier arm with a level and correct with the hexagon socket screws at the flange if necessary. 11. Switch on power supply. 12. Switch the"Service"switch on the control unit.The LED lights red. The display backlighting flashes. —4 See page 122, chapter 10.7.7 Mode"Service". 13. Close the barrier with the middle right button 41"at the control unit. 14. Check the horizontal alignment of the barrier arm with a level and correct with the hexagon socket screws at the flange if necessary. 15. Switch the"Service"switch on the control unit.The LED must light green. 16. Switch off power supply. 17. Install the barrier housing door. 18. Attach and lock the barrier housing hood. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 77 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation AM ErIC °` 5. Install the flange on the flange plates with the 2 hexagon socket screws 8 AF. Make sure: Tighten the screws evenly with a tightening torque of 44.254 Ibf ft(60 Nm). That the air gap between flange and flange plate must be consistent. i Fig. 30:Install flange to flange plate 6. Slide steel sleeve into the intended bore in the barrier arm. 7. Place barrier arm in the flange so that the barrier arm can be assembled. 8. Assemble barrier arm with hexagon screw,washer and hexagon nut. Fig. 31:Assemble barrier arm a 76 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M EnC .. Assembly and installation 13. Push the barrier into the top-most position. The clamping lever must be at the stop for the'open"position. If required, push straight through the upper tool bore with a tool to press the lever arm from the dead point. --> See page 168, chapter 13.5. 14. Check the vertical alignment of the barrier arm with a level and correct with the hexagon socket screws at the flange if necessary. 15. Switch on power supply. 16. Switch the"Service"switch on the control unit.The LED lights red. The display backlighting flashes. -> See page 122, chapter 10.7.7 Mode"Service". 17. Close the control unit with the middle right button 4111 at the control unit. 18. Check the horizontal alignment of the barrier arm with a level and correct with the hexagon socket screws at the flange if necessary. 19. Switch the"Service"switch on the control unit.The LED must light green. 20. Switch off power supply. 21. Install the barrier housing door. 22. Attach and lock the barrier housing hood. 8.11.2 Barrier arm type "MicroBoom-T" 1. Secure barrier danger area e.g.with barrier tape. 2. Remove the barrier housing hood. 3. Remove the barrier housing door. A-um WARNING! Danger of crushing between barrier arm and barrier housing! 4. Switch off power supply. Ensure that the system is powered down. Secure against reactivation.The balancing springs in the lever system are relaxed (boom raised). 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 75 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation Aff MC t5pow ` 8. Install end cap to the barrier arm. ® o Fig. 28:Install end cap 9. Push barrier arm with pre-assembled flange onto the flange shaft. a Fig. 29:Assemble flange with barrier arm 10. Align barrier arm vertically. 11. Install the flange on the flange shaft using the 4 hexagon socket screws. To tighten the screws evenly. Use a torque wrench with hexagon socket: 10 AF Tightening torque: 55.318 Ibf ft(75 Nm) 12. Close screws and threaded bores with the included grey plastic covers. Am 74 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTWm MicroD6\ie Assemb ly and installation WARNING! of crushing between barrier arm and barrier housing' Danger I Ensure that the system springs in 4 Switch off powers, Y Secure against reactivation.om raised).nc�ng down_ stem are relaxed the lever system the barrier arm. 5. Remove end cap Fig 25:Disassemble end cap side of slide a slot nut into the groove at the under d the barrier arrmrrier 6. arm. Place a slot nut on the Lipper O Fig.26:Assemble slot nuts e with the 4 hexagon socket screw of the the 7. Attach the Hang The shorter p two slot nuts to the barrier arm. end flange must point towards the barrier hexagon 5 AF Use a torque wrench with hexag16 NM) Tightening torque. 11.801 IV ft _ 1k o e a Fig-27:Assembling flange 73 5815,5001US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation /10.0 Enc The edge protection is included in the delivery loosely in 6.56 ft (2 m) pieces. If the barrier was ordered with the light strips option, the barrier arm is delivered with the mounted edge protection. The number of edge protections is according to the length of the long barrier arm profile. 1. Measure the length of the long barrier arm profile. 2. Shorten edge protection to the required length with a saw. When the length of the barrier arm profile is,for example, 11.5 ft(3.5 m), saw off one edge protection to 4.92 ft(1.5 m). 3. Moisten lower half of the barrier arm onto which the edge protection is pushed with water. 4. Slide edge protection in the barrier arm groove. 5. Slide further edge protections into the intended groove until the edge protection ends flush with the barrier arm. 8.11 Assembling flange and barrier arm Danger of injury A CAUTION! Danger of injury! Aq%� There is a danger of injury when mounting the barrier arm. Therefore: — Barrier arms as of a length of 14.8 ft(4.5 m) must be installed by two persons.We recommend also installing shorter barrier arms with two persons. 8.11.1 Type "VarioBoom" and "MicroBoom" Do not grease ' NOTICE! Improper lubrication of components, in particular the counter bearing or flange shaft, may lead to damage of the equipment! Therefore: Do not grease the counter bearing and flange shaft. 1. Secure barrier danger area e.g.with barrier tape. 2. Remove the barrier housing hood. 3. Remove the barrier housing door. 72 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive /PM Enc ' Assembly and installation 8.9 Assemble barrier arm type "VarioBoom" The barrier arm type"VarioBoom" is delivered in two parts. Short barrier arm profile with assembled connection plates, half- shells and end caps. Long barrier arm profile The mounting material is included in delivery. 1. Remove transport rubber bands. 2. Disassemble the two half-shells from the short barrier arm profile. 3. Slide long barrier arm profile over the two connection plates. 4. Attach long barrier arm profile to both connection plates with the 4 Torx.The larger bores must remain free. 5. Attach the two half-shells with the washers and the hexagon socket screws. 8.10 Assemble edge protection Missing edge protection at III fil the barrier arm NINE 7barrier ' m missing edge protection at the • ! Missing edge protection at the barrier arm may cause severe or lethal injury for persons, bicyclers and cabriolet drivers when the barrier arm closes! Therefore: — Assemble edge protection. — If the edge protection is damaged, it must be replaced immediately. 0 NOTE! If you use a pendulum support, observe that you must mount part of the edge protection in front of the pendulum support and part of the edge protection behind the pendulum support. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 71 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation Er" 8.8.2 Assemble receiver A B 1 X 3 X 4 ' O M X 5 3 0 2 M_ N N N 8 1.18(30) �$ Fig. 24: Assemble the receiver's light barrier housing on the post Dimensions in inch or feet are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. A Light barrier post 8 Light barrier housing 1 Gap 2 Drill holes for blind rivet nut 3 Hexagon socket screws 5 AF 4 Receiver 5 Receiver connection line 1. Press the two blind rivet nuts into the two intended bores at the post. 2. Guide the connection line for receiver through the gap in the post. 3. Connect connection line for receiver to the receiver. 4. Mount light barrier housing to housing with the hexagon socket screws 5 AF. 5. Close empty conduits with construction foam to prevent water from entering them. 70 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive En° " Assembly and installation 8.8 Assemble safety light barrier Only MAGNETIC safety light barriers must be used. 8.8.1 Assemble transmitter A B C e 1 A B 2.76 70 3.94 100 2 1.18 30 1.18 30 0.59 15 0.59 15 00.24 0 0.24 3 (0 6) (0 6) o cno, cro 0 1 Ci Ci o `O 0 24 0 24 tO 4 (0 6) (0 6) C-4 o 0 0.51 00.51 0 C,4 N 0 13 (0 13) N N t � O N A Fig. 23: Assemble the receiver's light barrier housing on the barrier housing Dimensions in inch or feet are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. A View A 8 View 8 C Light barrier housing transmitter 1 Hexagon socket screws 5 AF 2 Transmitter 3 Transmitter connection line 4 Cable screw connection 1. Drill holes for the light barrier housing according to Fig. 14. 2. Mount the cable screws at the housing with locknuts. 3. Connect connection line for transmitter to the control unit. 4. Guide connection line through cable screws. 5. Mount light barrier housing to housing with the hexagon socket screws 5 AF. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 69 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation ARM 8.7 Assemble light barrier post The light barrier post is attached with 4 foundation anchors each. Requirements mounting material MAGNETIC Automation Corporation recommends using 0 3/8" anchor bolts. ---> Refer to the anchor bolt manufacturers installation requirements. Assemble light barrier post 1. The foundation must have cured. 2. Drill holes for the foundation anchors according to the foundation plan, page 60, Fig. 17. In compliance with the indicated sizes. Drill-hole distance: 3.94 in (100 mm), square alignment Depth: 3.15 in (80 mm) (At this drilling depth, a minimum tensile strength of 2.02 kpf(9 kN) must be guaranteed.) 3. Set four foundation anchors. 4. Set up post upright on foundation. 5. Attach the post to the foundation with the anchor bolts and tighten the nuts securely. 68 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMT"MicroDrive NIA6NENC Assembly and installation 1. The foundation must have cured. 1 e �I 2 dft I� 4 5 " A ►1N I\ 6 7 8 9 0 N W Fig.22:Assemble housing 1 Barrier housing 2 Nut 3 Spring washer 4 Washer d8,4 5 Washer d13 6 Mounting profile 7 Foundation anchor 8 Foundation 9 Silicon sealant 2. Drill holes for the foundation anchors according to the foundation plan, page 58, Fig. 15. In compliance with the indicated sizes. Drill-hole distance: 7.01 in (180 mm), square alignment Depth: 3.15 in (80 mm) (At this drilling depth, a minimum tensile strength of 1.98 kpf(8.8 kN) must be guaranteed.) 3. Place four foundation anchors. 4. Set up barrier housing upright on foundation. 5. Barrier housing attached to mounting profile on the foundation with foundation anchors. Tighten nuts slightly for this. 6 Align barrier housing. Tighten nuts firmly. If a nesting post or light barrier post is installed, observe page 86, chapter 8.14. 7. Seal barrier housing with silicon sealant. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 67 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation AM EM 8.5 Unpacking The individual packages are packed according to the expected transport conditions. Only environment-friendly materials have been used for the packaging. The packaging should protect the individual components against transport damages, corrosion, etc up to the assembly. Therefore do not destroy the packaging and remove only directly before assembly. 1. Unpack barrier. - 2. Set up barrier housing vertically. 3. Lay down barrier arm. 4. Unpack and lay out accessories. 5. Separate material according to type and size and recycle them after use. 8.6 Assemble housing The barrier housing is attached by 4 foundation anchors via 2 attachment profiles. The attachment profiles are included in delivery. Requirements mounting material MAGNETIC Automation Corporation recommends using 0 3/8" anchor bolts. —> Refer to the anchor bolt manufacturers installation requirements. 66 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive /V5M` Assembly and installation 8.4.5 Installing induction loops under interlocking stone paving 1 5.91 11.8 (150) (300) ---2 CO o •M --- 4 \\ 5 S0105. Fig.21: Installing an induction loop under interlocking stone paving Dimensions in inch are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. 1 Barrier housing 2 Paving 3 Loop cable 4 Sand bed 5 Substructure When installing induction loops under interlocking stone paving, following points must be observed additionally: Use only pre-assembled cables. Install the induction loop in sand only. The induction loop must not be installed in gravel or split. The induction loop must not slip or shift or be damaged during later vehicle traffic. Keep a minimum clearance between paving and loop cable of approx. 1.18 in (30 mm). 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 65 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly nd installation Tiff Y 0` °"'R°` 2. Lay the loop carefully into the groove and push it down by means of a blunt object, such as a piece of wood. The insulation must by no means be damaged. 3. To avoid slipping of the loop, fix the loop using small wooden wedges. Remove the wooden wedges later on. 4. Push the loop feed line through the empty conduit in place into the barrier housing. 5. Measure the induction loop according to chapter 8.4.3. 6. We recommend to cover the inserted loop using quartz sand. Make sure that at least 0.98 in (25 mm) remain between the upper edge of the roadway and the quartz sand for the potting compound. 7. Seal the groove with the potting compound. =` The temperature resistance of the loop must match the temperature of the potting compound. 8. Allow the potting compound to cure. 1 5.91 11.8 (150) (300) / 2 \C'`a0 v �M Ci _ - 3 4 rn -� 6 50104a Fig. 20: Installing induction loop in bitumen, asphalt, or concrete Dimensions in inch are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. 1 Barrier housing 2 Groove with potting compound 3 Asphalt surface 4 Quartz sand filling 5 Loop cable 6 Foundation 64 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M GM Enc t5 �' Assembly and installation 8.4.2 Induction loops The induction loops are available as ready assembled cables in various lengths from several manufacturers. Make sure that they meet the specification described in these operating instructions. Alternatively a loop can be manufactured from single wire. The following requirements must be fulfilled: Wire cross section: 18 to 16 AWG (0.75 to 1.5 mmZ) Inductivity of the loop: 70 to 500 pH.This is equivalent to a loop with 3 to 6 windings. When using hot pouring compounds, such as bitumen temperature resistant loop cables/strands must be used. 8.4.3 Testing induction loops To verify the contact resistance, insulation resistance, and inductance of the loop these properties must be measured after installation: Contact resistance: 0.8 to 2.0 ohms Insulation resistance to earth: > 1 Mohm. Inductivity of the loop: 70 to 500 pH AOW If the values are not within the specified ranges, the loop is defective. 8.4.4 Installing induction loops in bitumen, asphalt, or concrete 1. Cut a 1.97 in (50 mm)deep groove into the surface or asphalt using a cutting disc.The groove must be equally deep at every point.According to Fig. 14 the corners of the groove must be cut in a 45°angle. 1 2 3 4 Fig. 19:Installing induction loop in bitumen,asphalt, or concrete 1 Groove for induction loop feed line 2 Corners cut diagonally 3 Groove for induction loop 4 Induction loop 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 63 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation A",=E"` 9m Please observe following points when installing the induction loop: Loop geometry and clearances Install the loop symmetrically to the barrier arm. Please make sure that the barrier arm is attached to the side of the barrier housing. The clearance of the safety loop for passenger cars in front of, and behind the barrier arm must be at least 19.7 in (500 mm). The safety loop for trucks must be dimensioned larger. —>See page 31, Fig. 3 to page 39, Fig.6. The distance of the induction loop from the roadside should be about 11.8 in to 19.7 in (300 to 500 mm). Install opening loops right in front of the safety loop.The clearance between opening loop and safety loop must be not greater than 3.28 ft(1 m)for trucks and passenger cars. If there are iron reinforcements, ramp heating etc. in the roadway, the induction loop must have a clearance of at least 1.97 in (50 mm)from those. Metals in the proximity of the induction loop affect the response sensitivity. Avoid direct contact of induction loops with reinforcement and ramp heating. Install induction loops with sufficient clearance from sliding gates, roller grilles etc. Installation and ground conditions , Please make sure when moulding or installing that the loop can not move anymore once it is in operation. Any geometric alteration will act as inductance change,which will set the detector to an error state. Brittle road surfaces, loose pavements, gravel paths etc. are not suited for the application of induction loops. Feed line The feed line to the loop must not exceed 49.2 ft(15 m). The loop connection cable must protrude about 4.9 ft(1.5) m from the foundation. Shorten the feed line to the loop to the proper length. The feed line must by no means be coiled. The feed line must be twisted up to right in front of the terminals of the loop detector with ca. 6 twists per feet. 62 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M MAG5 Assembly and installation 8.4 Assembly and installation of induction loops Depending on the application safety installations must be installed on site. Induction loops, light barriers, etc. can be used as safety installations. The safety installations must ensure that the barrier closes only after the vehicle has passed through. Safety installations, such as induction loops can be purchased from MAGNETIC. 8.4.1 Directions for the assembly and installation of induction loops On barriers with an automatic closing function induction loops are used for the detection of vehicles. The loop underneath the barrier arm always serves as monitor and closing loop. Meaning, as long as a vehicle is standing on the loop, the barrier stays open. Only after the vehicle has left the loop will the barrier be closed. \ 3 \ 2 a 1 Fig. 18: Arrangement example of an induction loop for passenger car operation 1 Roadway 2 Induction loop 3 Projection of the barrier arm onto the subsurface with a standard installation of the loop The induction loop setup depends on the application case. For other application cases, refer to page 50, chapter 7. ems' 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 61 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation ""G"E" look `�r° Laying the foundation, e1��` IN"X installing empty conduits " x=3.94(100) 1 II 2 i "� \ s m 4 � 3 E N 8N 01 A Fig. IT Foundation plan for light barrier post Dimensions in inch or feet are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. 1 Foundation anchor(4 pcs.) 2 Concrete foundations(C35145 XD3 XF2) 3 Optional for light barriers: Empty conduit for receiver connection line 4 Foundation depth:at least 800 mm, frost-protected foundation depth to be adjusted to the local situation. 1. Dig foundation hole pursuant to Fig. 14 and Fig. 17. 2. Place empty conduit pursuant to Fig. 17 in the foundation hole. 3. Close empty conduit to prevent water from entering. 4. Fill concrete foundation pursuant to Fig. 17. 5. Create flat line in the base area.The following requirements must be fulfilled: Level and horizontal. Surface deviation: max. 1 in/ft2 (1 mm/m2) 6. Let concrete cure. 60 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTd MicroDrive ETI` Assembly and installation y 3. Place empty conduits pursuant to Fig. 15 in the foundation hole. 4. Close empty conduits to prevent water from entering. 5. Fill concrete foundation pursuant to Fig. 14. 6. Create flat line in the base area. The following requirements must be fulfilled: Level and horizontal. Surface deviation: max. 1 in/ft2(1 mm/mz) 7. Let concrete cure. 8. Apply moisture protection agent to concrete surface. 0 NOTE! We recommend applying moisture protection either in the form of sealing sludges such as 1100 Hansit or ready-made solution such as Sikagardo 703 W or deepdry®to the concrete surface before housing assembly. Moisture protection prevents entering of moisture into the housing from the concrete floor. 8.3.2 Foundation and empty conduits for light barrier post Assembly site The nesting post and light barrier post must not be put up where there is a danger of flooding. Foundation The foundation must meet the following requirements: —>See page 56, Fig. 14 and page 60, Fig. 17. Have sufficient load-carrying capacity. (concrete foundations: C35/45 XD3 XF2) Water cement value: 0.5 Foundation depth: at least 31.5 in (800 mm),frost-protected foundation depth to be adjusted to the local situation. Foundation section: 11.81 x 11.81 in (300 mm x 300 mm) Empty conduit If the barrier system is equipped with a light barrier, an empty conduit must be installed for the transmitter connection line. Conduits have to be planned to a sufficient length. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 59 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation """I° Laying the foundation, Aqo , 63 79 Installing empty conduits 1 a � � 2 7 \ E 3 4 5 �0� $ Fig. 15: Foundation plan Dimensions in inch or feet are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. 1 Foundation anchor(4 pcs.) 2 Optional when using loop connection; empty conduit for loop connection, diameter: 1.14 in(29 mm) 3 Empty conduit for induction loop, diameter: 1.14 in(29 mm) 4 Empty conduit for control lines, diameter: 1.14(29 mm) 5 Concrete foundations(C35145 XD3 XF2) 6 Roadway 7 Foundation depth:at least 31.5 in(800 mm), frost-protected foundation depth to be adjusted to the local situation. 1. Dig foundation hole pursuant to Fig. 14 and Fig. 15. 0 651 665, 31 17.7x (5 x 0 (5 x f68 450 x 390)) 3 x 00.47 25.2 x 16.1 (3 x 012 640 x 410) Fig. 16: Reinforcement grid Dimensions in inch or feet are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. 2. Place reinforcement grid pursuant to Fig. 16 in the foundation hole. 58 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M MAGN Enc �' Assembly and installation 8.3.1 Foundation and empty conduits for the barrier Assembly site The assembly site must meet the following requirements: The barrier must be visible from the operating person. The barrier must not be put up where there is a danger of flooding. Keep a safety distance of at least 2 ft(610 mm) between the barrier arm and objects such as walls, buildings, etc. See page 28, chapter 2.7 and page 56, Fig. 14 Foundation and reinforcement The foundation must meet the following requirements: —>See page 56, Fig. 14 and page 58, Fig, 15. Have sufficient load-carrying capacity. (concrete foundations: C35/45 XD3 XF2) Water cement value: 0.5 Foundation depth: at least 31.5 in (800 mm), frost-protected foundation depth to be adjusted to the local situation. Foundation section: 17.7 in x 23.6 in (450 mm x 600 mm) Reinforcing mesh as shown in figure Fig. 16. Surface has to be non-combustible material. Empty conduits The empty conduits must meet the following requirements: See page 56, Fig. 15. Separate empty conduits for mains cable and control line Diameter: 1.14 ft(29 mm) each Optional empty conduit for induction loop. Diameter: 1.14(29 mm)each Conduits have to be planned to a sufficient length. 0 NOTE! To provide a trouble-free operation use separate conduits for control lines and mains cables. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 57 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation Aff. NEnC 8.3 Foundation and empty conduits j 1 1\ min.2 ft min.2 ft (min.610) (min.610) °o ri c 0 m 747 6 `� M E 5 11.81 300 Fig. 14: Assembly boom system Dimensions in inch or feet are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. 1 Object such as wall, building, etc. Keep a safety distance of at least 2 ft(610 mm)between the barrier arm and other objects, such as walls,masonry or houses. —�See page 28, chapter 2.7 2 Posts, e.g. nesting posts,place post centre at a distance of 50 mm to the barrier arm tip 3 Empty conduit for induction loop connection 4 One empty conduit each for mains cable and control lines 5 Foundation with reinforcement grid for barrier housing 6 Optional:Empty conduit for safety light barriers, connection line receiver 7 Optional:Foundation for nesting post or light barrier post, nesting post displayed here 56 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive _.. MAGNETIC Assembly and installation 8.2 Required steps The following steps are to be completed prior to assembly and installation: Laying the foundation with reinforcement for the barrier and install empty conduits. Set up foundation for light barrier post and empty conduits. Installing induction loops. The following procedures have to be observed during assembly and installation: Unpack barrier and accessories. Mount barrier housing on the foundation. Mount light barrier post on the foundation. Mount safety light barrier. _> Assemble barrier arm (VarioBoom only). Mount edge protection. Mount barrier arm. Adjust balancing springs. Align barrier housing and light barrier post. Assemble and install signalling device. Arrange electrical connections. —> See page 91, chapter 9. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 55 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Assembly and installation AaMAGNEnc General WARNING! ' Danger by inappropriate installation! Inappropriate installation can cause severe injuries! Therefore: — Only specialist personnel or electrical specialists must perform any assembly and installation tasks. — Prior to work, ensure that there is sufficient assembly space. — Pay attention to tidiness and cleanness at the assembly site! Loosely stacked or lying around components and tools are accident sources. — Comply with specifications for foundations and reinforcement. — Ensure correct arrangement and fit on all assemblies and components. — Install the indicated fastening elements correctly. Personal protective equipment The following must be worn during all assembly and installation work: ft Work clothes Protective gloves Safety shoes Protective helmet. Aak- 54 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M MAGN EnC N N Assembl and installation 8 Assembly and installation 8.1 Safety See also safety notes on page 20, chapter 2.6"Occupational safety and special dangers". Non-intended use mm WARNING! Non-intended use is dangerous! Any use of the barriers other than intended and/or in a different manner can cause hazardous situations. The barrier system is intended for installation only on crossings used for vehicles. Pedestrians must be supplied with a separate access opening. The pedestrian access opening shall be designed to promote pedestrian usage. Locate the barrier such that persons will not come in contact with the vehicular passageway during the entire path of travel of the vehicular barrier. Danger of crushing and shearing, , barrier arm WARNING! Danger of crushing and shearing when the barrier opens or closes! When a barrier opens or closes, the barrier arm may lead to severe crushing or injury! Therefore: — Keep a safety distance of at least 2 ft(610 mm) between the barrier arm and other objects, such as walls, masonry or houses. -*See also page 28, chapter 2.7 — Install the barrier system only when all exposed pinch points are eliminated or guarded. — Assemble and install barrier system according to Fig. 14. — Controls intended for user activation must be located at least 6 ft(1.83 m)away from any moving part of the barrier and where the user is prevented from reaching over, under, around or through the barrier to operate the controls. Outdoor or easily accessible controls shall have a security feature to prevent unauthorized use. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 53 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Design notes for induction loops Aff EFIAnk Arrangement of truck/ ca.3.28 ft ca.3.28 ft passenger car loops (1.00 m) ca.4.92 ft (1-00m) 3.28 ft 3.28 ft (1.50 m) (1.00 m) (1.00 m) ca.3.28 ft 1 (1.00 m) ca.4.92 ft 2 3 (1.50 m) ca.3.28 ft (1.00 m) 4 Fig. 13:Lorry/passenger car loops 1 Safety loop truck(inductance L 1) 2 Safety loop passenger car(inductance L2) 3 Opening loop truck and passenger car 4 Barrier Observe overall inductance For calculation, see below. For combined truck/passenger car loops following points must be additionally observed: The winding direction of the inner safety loop for passenger cars must be identical to the outer safety loop for trucks. Meaning, the sensitivity in the middle between outer and inner loop is then at its maximum. Outer and inner loop can be both connected with one detector channel, as the case may be. The overall inductance determines,whether the truck and the passenger car loop have to be implemented as series or as parallel circuit.Always lead both feed lines into the barrier housing. The overall inductance must be between 70 and 500µH. Calculation of the overall Dotal=Ll+L2 inductance for series circuits Calculation of the overall Ll•L2 inductance for parallel circuits Dotal= L1+L2 52 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 M Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGN 3 Desi n notes for induction loops Arrangement passenger car loops 1 2 —passage with long opening loop 3 Fig. 11:Passenger car loops—passage with long opening time 1 Safety loop 2 Opening loop 3 Barrier Due to a long opening loop vehicles can drive through without needing to stop. Arrangement of truck loops 8.20 ft—13.1 ft 3.28 ft 3.28 ft (2.50 m—4.00 m) (1.00 m) (1.00 m) 1 2 max.13.1 ft (4.00 m) ca.0.98 ft 0.,30 m) 3 Fig. 12:Lorry loops 1 Safety loop 2 Opening loop 3 Barrier For truck passages the safety loop in the direction of travel must be at least 8.2 ft(2.5 m) long. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 51 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Design notes for induction loops nom° 7 Design notes for induction loops —> For assembly and inspection, see page 61, chapter 8.4. Please observe following points when dimensioning the induction loops: Induction loops respond only to metal. The mass is thereby not important, but the size of the loop's surface,which will be covered by the metal part is. The induction loops must not respond to persons or objects with a small metal portion like a bicycle for instance. Safety loops must secure the danger area underneath the barrier arm throughout the entire length. Opening loops must be installed right in front of the safety loop. The maximum distance between safety loop and opening loop must be not greater than max. 3.28 ft(1.0 m). Arrangement passenger car loops max. 1 —standard 3.28 ft 3.28 ft 3.28 ft (1.00 m) (1.00 m) (1.00 m) 2 3 6.56 ft (2.00 m) ca.0.98 ft (0.30 m) 4 Fig. 10:Passenger car loop 1 Maximum distance between opening loop and safety loop 2 Safety loop 3 Opening loop 4 Barrier 50 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M Enc Transport and storage 6.3 Transport Barrier housing and barrier arm are delivered separately. The lifting gear must be designed for the weight of the barrier housing and barrier arm. For transport barrier modules refer to the safety notes on page 47, chapter 6.1. For future transports: Secure loose cables. Secure against vibrations. Securely fasten the barrier housing and barrier arm prior to transport(e.g. screw it onto a pallet). Transport and put down barrier housing and barrier arm with a forklift and lift with suitable lifting gear. 6.4 Storage Store the barrier or packages under the following conditions: Do not store outdoors. Store dry and dust free. POW, Do not expose to aggressive media. Protect against solar irradiation. Avoid mechanical vibrations. Storage temperature:—22 to+158 °F(-30 to+70°C) Relative humidity: max. 95%, non-condensing Check the general condition of all components and packaging regularly, if they are stored for longer periods than 3 months. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 49 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Transport and storage AM'�" Improper transport NOTICE! The barrier system can be damaged by improper transport! Substantial material damages can result from improper transport. Therefore: — Have all transport work performed by trained personnel. — When unloading the packages and during in- house transportation always proceed with greatest care and caution. — Observe the symbols on the packaging. — Observe the dimensions of the barrier system. — Loading, unloading as well as moving the barrier system must take place with greatest care. — Only remove packaging directly before assembly. Personal protective equipment The following must be worn during all transport work: ,,m* Work clothes Protective gloves Safety shoes Protective helmet. 6.2 Transport inspection Immediately check the delivery after receipt for completeness and transport damages. Proceed as follows in the case of outwardly recognisable transport damage: Do not accept the delivery or only under reserve. Note the extent of damage on the transport documents or on the delivery note of the forwarder. Lodge complaint. 0 NOTE! Lodge a complaint for each defect, as soon as it is recognized. Compensation claims can only be submitted within the valid complaint periods. 48 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive N M MAG flIC C ROW c9mlfflol* Transport and storage 6 Transport and storage 6.1 Safety Improper transport WARNING! ' Danger from improper transport of the barrier •` arm and housing! The weight of the barrier arm or housing can severely injure a person! Therefore: — Have them transported by specialists only. — Use lifting gear or forklift with a suitable pallet. — Use suitable lifting gear(loops, etc.)for lifting the barrier arm and barrier housing. The lifting gear must be designed for the respective weights. — Lifting and carrying the barrier arm and housing from the pallet should be done by a minimum of two people. !'"• Heavy weight WARNING! Risk of injury when lifting heavy objects alone! The weight of heavy objects can severely injure a person! Therefore: Lifting and carrying the barrier arm and housing from the pallet should be done by a minimum of two people. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 47 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Design and function /W5NEW ONI� 5.2 Function The barrier consists of a barrier housing with drive system and a barrier arm. The drive system consists of an electric motor, control unit, and the lever system. The lever system locks the barrier arm in both end positions. In case of power outage, the barrier arm can easily be moved by hand. Integrated balancing springs in the lever system balance out the boom weight exactly.These balancing springs are pre-set in the factory. Sensors integrated in the motor supply exact data on every correct position of the barrier arm and thus serve the control unit to control the best acceleration and deceleration. For the series"Access"and"Parking",the angled barrier arm "VarioBoom"is used, this barrier arm enables driving through even at an opening of only 35°. For the"Toll'series,the barrier arm is designed as a"Swing Away". That means, if a vehicle drives against the boom, it will snap from its flange. Depending on version, the barrier arm will automatically or by hand be returned to its original position. Safety facilities like induction loops or safety light barriers must be installed on site in all cases. The safety installations must ensure that the barrier closes only after the vehicle has passed through. Safety installations, such as induction loops can be purchased from MAGNETIC. The safety light barriers must be MAGNETIC ones. 46 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMT"MicroDrive MA"EnC MOMMROU" Design and function 5.1.3 Toll 1 2 3 4 � Fig.9: Design barrier system series "Toll" 1 Barrier housing 2 "MicroBoom-T"barrier arm 3 Empty conduits for mains cable, control lines and induction loop 4 Concrete foundation with reinforcement 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 45 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Design and function //""G"En" 5.1.2 Access Pro H 1 2 0 3 4 5 z Fig. 8: Design barrier series Access Pro H" 1 Barrier housing 2 MicroBoom Access Pro H 3 Pendulum support from 15 ft(4.57 m)barrier arm length 4 Empty conduits for mains cable, control lines and induction loop 5 Concrete foundation with reinforcement 44 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M EnC Design and function 5 Design and function 5.1 Design 5.1.1 Access and Parking 1 2 O 3 MI 4 5 � Fig. 7: Barrier system design series Access"and Series'Parking" 1 Barrier housing 2 VarioBoom(barrier arm) 3 Pendulum support from 15 ft(4.57 m)barrier arm length 4 Empty conduits for mains cable, control lines and induction loop 5 Concrete foundation with reinforcement 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 43 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Technical data 4.6 Plug-in module "Detector A—B" Designation Unit Plug-in module"Detector A—B" Current consumption mA 50 Number of loop detectors — 2 (A and B) Inductance range µH 70 to 500 Number of induction loop — 10 levels sensitivity levels Response sensitivity % Selectable: 0.01 to 2.0 induction loop Table 19:Plug-in module "Detector A-8" 4.7 Plug-in module "Radio" Designation Unit Plug-in module"Radio" Current consumption mA 20 Frequency hand transmitter MHz 433 HF Modulation — FM/AM (depending on region) Grant of equipment — FCC Identifier: QV2-SMD-53200RX authorization (Certificate) FCC 02-157 See page 179, chapter 17. Table 20:Plug-in module "Radio" 42 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive /P= Enc Technical data 4.5 Control unit Designation Unit i MGC (MAGNETIC Gate Controller) Supply voltage V DC 24 Current consumption — max. 1 A, max. 300 mA+ current consumption of the different plug-in modules Power consumption — max 24 W, Max. 7.2 W+ power consumption of the different plug-in modules Control device safety — 1 A T Output clamp X2 Output voltage V DC 24 Max. output current mA 300 ,__ . ...,.,__ Digital inputs Number — 8 Input voltage V DC 24± 10% Input current — < 10 mA per input Max. line length without ft(m) 100�(30)p -®�� overvoltage module's Digital outputs Number — 4 (open collector) !` Switching voltage V DC 24± 10% Max. switching current mA 100 Max. line length without ft(m) 100 (30) overvoltage module's Output relay Number — 3 normally-open contact and 3 change-over contacts, isolated Max. switching voltage V AC/DC 30 Switching current mA 1107A to 1 A Max. line length without ft(m) 100(30) overvoltage module's Display — Graphics display, 128 x 65 Pixel Language display — Selectable: German, English, French, Spanish, Italian or Portuguese Number of slots for plug-in modules — 5 1) For line lengths exceeding 30 m, overvoltage modules must be installed in front of the terminal clamps. Table 18:Control unit 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 41 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Technical data �En" Designation Unit Toll Toll Pro Line width ft(m) 10(3) Barrier housing in (mm) See page 43, Fig. 7. (width x depth x height) 12.4 x 14.7 x 43.9(315 x 360 x 1115) Weight barrier housing Ibs (kg) 92.6(42) Table 14:Dimensions and weight—"Toll"series 4.4.2 Electrical connection Designation Unit Toll Toll Pro Supply voltage VAC 85 to 264 Frequency Hz 50/60 Nominal current A 1.0 1.5 consumption 's Max. peak current A 6.0 6.5 consumption 2) Nominal power W 110 220 consumption Duty cycle % 100 1) The values refer to a power supply of 120 V AC/60 Hz and without accessories. 2) The values refer to a power supply of 120 V AC/60 Hz, with illumination, service socket not used. Using the service socket in the barrier housing increases the current consumption by 5 A. Table 15:Electrical connection—"Toll"series 4.4.3 Operating conditions Designation Unit Toll Toll Pro Ambient temperature °F (°C) -22 to+122( 30 to+50) range Wind force Bft max. 10 (Beaufort) Protection class — IP 54 barrier housing Table 16:Operating conditions—'Toll'series 4.4.4 Operating time Designation Unit Toll Toll Pro Opening time/ s 1.3 0.9 Closing time Table 17:Operating time-'Toll'series 40 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGN ETI` Technical data 4.4 Toll 4.4.1 Dimensions and weight 1 1 min.2 ft min.2 ft (min.610) 10 ft(3000) (min.610) I � o rn � rn ri °D 7 cgi � min.31.5(800) 14.2 A (I 3so) Micro Boom-T v�; 2 LO 0� 3.82(97) L Fig. 6: Dimensions barrier system and barrier arm profile—"Toll'series Dimensions in inch or feet are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. 1 Object such as wall, building. etc. -->See also page 28, chapter 2.7. 2 Barrier arm "MicroBoom-T"type with round boom profile A Barrier.left version B Barrier.right version 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 39 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Technical data �'" nc �` °""�` Designation Unit Parking Parking Pro Parking Select Line width ft(m) 12 12 12 (3.66) (3.66) (3.66) Barrier housing in (mm) See page 37, Fig. 5. (width x depth x height) 12.4 x 13.6 x 36.0(315 x 360 x 915) Weight barrier housing Ibs(kg) 88.2 (40) Table 10:Dimensions and weight—"Parking"series 4.3.2 Electrical connection Designation Unit Parking Parking Pro Parking Select Supply voltage VAC 85 to 264 Frequency Hz 50/60 Nominal Current A 1.0 1.5 1.5 consumption Max. peak current A 4.0 5.0 5.0 consumption z> Nominal power W 35 95 95 consumption 's Duty cycle % 100 1) The values refer to a power supply of 120 VAC/60 Hz and without accessories. 2) The values refer to a power supply of 120 V AC/60 Hz, with illumination, service socket not used. Using the service socket in the barrier housing increases the current consumption by 5 A. Table 11:Electrical connection—'Parking"series 4.3.3 Operating conditions Designation Unit Parking Parking Pro Parking Select Ambient temperature °F (°C) -22 to+122 (-30 to +50) range Wind force Bft max. 10 (Beaufort) Protection class — IP 54 barrier housing Table 12:Operating conditions—Series 'Parking" 4.3.4 Operating times Designation ; Unit Parking Parking Pro Parking Select Opening time/ s 1.8 1.3 1.3 Closing time Table 13:Operating times-'Parking"series 38 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive '"`G"En` Technical data 4.3 Parking 4.3.1 Dimensions and weight 1 1 min.2 ft min.2 ft (min.610) 12 ft(3660) (min.610) Lo N I.- O O O ru, U M A M O M O N min.31.5(800) 14.2 Al g0(3, � VarioBoom <Lo V O 3.82(97 2.17 (55) B Fig. 5: Dimensions barrier system and barrier arm profile— "Parking"series Dimensions in inch or feet are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. 1 Object such as wall,building. etc. -�See also page 28, chapter 2.7. 2 MicroBoom(barrier arm)with octagon boom profile A Barrier.left version B Barrier. right version 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 37 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Technical data AffEnc 4.2.4 Operating times Designation Unit Access Pro H ft(m) 12(3.66) 14(4.3) 20(6.00) Opening time/ s 4.0 4.0 4.0 Closing time Table 9:Operating times-Access Pro H" 36 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMT"MicroDrive E" Technical data Designation Unit Access Pro H ft(m) 12(3.66 15(4.57) 20(6.00) Line width ft(m) 12 15 20 (3.66) (4.57) (6.00) Barrier housing in (mm) —>See page 34, Fig. 4. (width x depth x height) 12.4 x 13.6 x 36.0 (315 x 360 x 915) Weight barrier housing Ibs(kg) 97 (44) Table 6:Dimensions and weight—Access Pro H"series 4.2.2 Electrical connection Designation Unit Access Pro H ft(m) 12(3.66) 15(4.57) 20(6.00) Supply voltage VAC 85 to 264 Frequency Hz 50/60 Nominal current A 0.5 0.5 0.5 consumption Max. peak current A 3.0 3.0 3.0 consumption 2) Nominal power W 25 25 25 consumption 's Duty cycle % 100 1) The values refer to a power supply of 120 V AC/60 Hz and without accessories. 2) The values refer to a power supply of 120 V AC/60 Hz, with illumination, service socket not used. Using the service socket in the barrier housing increases the current consumption by 5 A. Table 7:Electrical connection—Access Pro H"series 4.2.3 Operating conditions Designation Unit Access Pro H ft(m) 12(3.66) 15(4.57) 20(6.00) Ambient temperature °F (°C) —22 to+122 (-30 to +50) range Wind force Bft maximal 10 (Beaufort) Protection class — IP 54 barrier housing Table 8:Operating conditions—Access Pro H" 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 35 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Technical data AM Enc 4.2 Access Pro H 4.2.1 Dimensions and weight 1A 1 1 min.2 ft min.2 ft (min.610) 12 ft(3660)/14 ft(4300)/20 ft(6000) (min.610) i G3 rn n rn ri Co v M M min.31.5(800) A 1144.2�.{ MicroBoom (36� 1 I 2 - 0 EL v� �$ N ______________________________________ ♦_ C °i 2.17 3.82 97 - - - (55) B ~ R 8 Fig. 4: Dimensions barrier system and barrier arm profile-"Access Pro H"series Dimensions in inch or feet are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. 1 Object such as wall, building, etc. 2 MicroBoom(barrier arm)with octagon boom profile A Barrier, left version B Barrier,right version 34 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive 11 MAGN Enc Technical data 4.1.4 Operating times Designation Unit Access Access Pro Access Select L L L Opening time/ s 2.2 4.0 1.3 4.0 1.3 4.0 Closing time Table 5:Operating times-Access"series 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 33 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Technical data Aam'0" C °� , Designation Unit Access Access Pro Access Select L L L Line width ft(m) 12 15 12 20 12 20 (3.66) (4.57) (3.66) (6.10) (3.66) (6.10) Barrier housing in (mm) See page 31, Fig. 3. (width x depth x height) 12.4 x 13.6 x 36.0(315 x 360 x 915) Weight barrier housing Ibs(kg) 88.2 (40) Table 2:Dimensions and weight—'Access"series 4.1.2 Electrical connection Designation Unit Access Access Pro Access Select x � z L L L Supply voltage VAC 85 to 264 Frequency Hz 50/60 Nominal current A 0.5 0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.5 consumption 's Max. peak current A 2.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 consumption 2> Nominal power W 25 25 95 25 95 25 consumption 's Duty cycle % 100 1) The values refer to a power supply of 120 V AC/60 Hz and without accessories. 2) The values refer to a power supply of 120 V AC/60 Hz, with illumination, service socket not used. Using the service socket in the barrier housing increases the current consumption by 5 A. Table 3:Electrical connection—'Access"series 4.1.3 Operating conditions Designation Unit Access Access Pro Access Select L L L Ambient temperature T(°C) -22 to+122 (-30 to+50) range Wind force Bft max. 10 (Beaufort) Protection class _ IP 54 barrier housing Table 4:Operating conditions-'Access"series 32 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGN Technical data 4 Technical data 4.1 Access 4.1.1 Dimensions and weight j 1 1 min.2 ft min.2 ft (min.610) 12 ft(3660)/14 ft(4300)/20 ft(6000) (min.610) LO m � M Co V M O M (O *7 N ------ --------- min.31.5(800) 14.2 A (3, 60 ~� VarioBoom 2 �� N _________________________________-____ � IRA O M 3.82 97 _ 2.17 - (55) B Fig. 3: Dimensions barrier system and barrier arm profile—'Access"series Dimensions in inch or feet are without parenthesis. Dimensions in mm are in parenthesis. 1 Object such as wall, building. etc. -->See also page 28, chapter 2.7. 2 VarioBoom(barrier arm)with octagon boom profile A Barrier. left version B Barrier. right version 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 31 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Identification AM nc °'" 3.2 Type code — R A 0 3 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Position Description 1 -13 Product group: ACCESS Magnetic.Acess ACCESS-L Magnetic.Access lang _ ACCESS PRO Magnetic.Access Pro ACCESS PRO-L Magnetic.Access Pro lang ACCESS PRO-H Magnetic.Access Pro hoch ACCESS SEL Magnetic.Access Select ACCESS SEL-L Magnetic.Access Select lang PARKING Magnetic.Parking PARING PRO Magnetic.Parking Pro PARKING SEL Magnetic.Parking Select TOLL Magnetic.Toll TOLL PRO Magnetic.Toll Pro 14 15 L=Left version R=Right version 16 A=Standard wide range 85—264 V AC/47—63 Hz C=UL-version(US market) 17-19 Line width Standard length: 010= 10 feet 012= 12 feet 015=15 feet 020=20 feet 20 Colours 0= Top cover: IGP-DuraFace 581 MA20000A00(RAL 2000) Housing: IGP-DuraFace 622SA22770A00(RAL2000) Doors: IGP-DuraFace 5803E71319A10(anthracite) 1 = Top cover: IGP-DuraFace 581 ME71384A10(grey aluminium) Housing: IGP-DuraFace 622SE71384A10(grey aluminium) Doors: IGP-DuraFace 5803E71319A10(anthracite) 2= Top cover: IGP-DuraFace 581 ME90060Al0(white aluminium) Housing: IGP-DuraFace 622SE90060A10(white aluminium) Doors: IGP-DuraFace 5803E71319A10(anthracite) 4= Top cover: IGP-DuraFace 6825A901 00A1 0(white aluminium) Housing: IGP-DuraFace 6825A90100A10(white aluminium) Doors: IGP-DuraFace 5803E71319A10(anthracite) 21 p 30 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive �II .._. enc ,. Identification 3 Identification 3.1 Type plate The type plate is provided inside at the barrier housing, next to the hood attachment. ' Magnetic 0.79650 Schopfhelm S-Nr. 2 Made in Germany Fig.2: Type plate 1 Type code 2 Serial number 3 Power supply, Frequency 4 Nominal current consumption(max.peak current consumption) + additional current consumption when using the service socket 5 Operating time(Opening time%losing time) 6 Protection class 7 Duty cycle 8 Manufacturing year and month 9 Bar code for type code 10 Bar code for serial number 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 29 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Safety AffEnC 2.7 Danger area Danger of crushing and shearing, , barrier arm WARNING! Danger of crushing and shearing when the T 7 opens or closes! When a barrier opens or closes, the barrier arm may lead to severe crushing or injury! Therefore: — Keep a distance of at least 2 ft(610 mm) between the barrier arm and other objects, such as walls, masonry or houses. — Install the barrier system only when all exposed pinch points are eliminated or guarded. /FA: min.2 ft 610 mm I I I 1 I 1 I I 1 I 1 1 ' 1 I I I . , 1 I . I I I ; 1 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I I 1 I a 1 J ' A \ 1 \ r 1 , Q Y/ \ I 1 All / a I A A I I Q Fig. 1:Danger area A Danger area of at least 2 ft(610 mm) 28 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 n Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M Enc Safety Illegible signage CAUTION! ' Risk of injury by illegible symbols! Labels and signs can become dirty or unrecognisable in the course of time. Therefore: — Always keep safety,warning and operating notes in a well readable condition. — Immediately renew damaged or unrecognisable signs or labels. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 27 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Safety fiff E"` Insufficient fixing WARNING! ' Risk of injury at insufficient fixing! Insufficient fixing of individual components such as barrier housing, barrier arm and additions permitted by the manufacturer can cause severe injury! - Therefore: — Only qualified and skilled personnel are allowed to assemble the barrier and the appropriate components. — Check the foundation anchors fit tightly before starting the barrier. — Check the firm fixing of all screws according to maintenance schedule. Danger of crushing, lever system and flange shaft WARN Dangeened barrier housing at the lange shaft! 7 The levflange shaft in the barrier housing can cause serious crushing injuries! Therefore: — Only skilled personnel are allowed work on the barrier housing and barrier arm. — Only work at the barrier housing when the power supply is turned off. — Assemble barrier housing without barrier arm. — For assembly of the barrier arm, strictly observe the descriptions in chapter 8.7. — Wear protective gloves if necessary. Danger of crushing, barrier arm and flange O'M: WARNING! ` Danger of crushing between barrier arm and barrier housing! Moving parts may cause serious crushing injuries! Therefore: — Only skilled personnel are allowed work on the barrier housing and barrier arm. — Only work at the barrier housing when the power supply is turned off 26 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MOWMROU'°enc � Safety Improper transport WARNING! Danger from improper transport of the barrier • arm and housing! The weight of the barrier arm or housing can _ severely injure a person! Therefore: — Have them transported by specialists only. — Use lifting gear or forklift with a suitable pallet. — Use suitable lifting gear(loops, etc.)for lifting the barrier arm and barrier housing. The lifting gear must be designed for the respective weights. — Carrying and lifting the barrier arm and housing from the pallet should be done by at least two people. Heavy weight WARNING! Risk of injury when lifting heavy objects alone! d The weight of heavy objects can severely injure a person! Therefore: Lifting and carrying the barrier arm and housing from the pallet should be done by a minimum of two people. Falling components WARNING! 1 Risk of injury from falling components! Falling components such as the barrier arm can cause severe injury! Therefore: — Only place the barrier arm horizontally. — Only install the barrier arm when there is no or little wind. — Secure the barrier housing against tilting before assembly. — Install the barrier housing correctly. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 25 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Safety ARM,E" - Entering the danger area of the barrier WARNING! ' Danger from entering the danger area! The MAGNETIC MHTMTM MicroDrive barriers are intended exclusively for closing off passages for motor vehicles and trucks. For vehicles that cannot be detected by induction loops, additional safety measures must be provided. Entering the danger area can cause severe or lethal injuries. - Therefore, the operator must take the following measures: — Observing country-specific laws and regulations. — Presence of persons and animals must be excluded. — Marking the danger area by prohibition signs for persons, bicyclers, etc. — If required, set up barriers such as fences and railings. — If required, set up separate passageway for persons and bicycles. Closing boom WARNING! ' Danger from closing boom! A closing boom may cause severe or lethal injury to persons, bicycler and cabriolet drivers! Therefore: — Install safety installations, such as a MAGNETIC safety light barrier as surveillance device. The surveillance device must prevent the closing of the barrier in case a person or a vehicle is standing below the barrier. — Only use barrier arms approved of by MAGNETIC. — Assemble edge protection. — If the edge protection was damaged it must be replaced immediately or the barrier must be taken out of operation. 24 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGN Safety Improper operation AWARNING! Danger from improper operation of the barrier! Improper operation of the barrier can cause severe or lethal injuries! Therefore: — The barrier closes automatically in certain program modes. Passing of two vehicles within a single opening process must be prevented by the construction and appropriate signs or signals. — The barrier is intended for a single drive direction at the same time. The operator must prevent concurrent oncoming traffic by suitable measures, such as signs. — Only additions to the barrier casing or boom that are permitted by the manufacturer may be installed. — Keep barrier area free from objects. — Do not use the barrier arm as a lifting device. — Never climb over or crawl under boom. — Never sit on the barrier housing or climb over it. — Do not sit or have yourself lifted by the boom. — Never open or stop the boom manually. Awk 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 23 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Safety �Il"7A6NEAC Electric voltage— A DANGER! missing protective facilities DANGER! Mortal danger by electric voltage! i The safety installations that are required according to regional and local regulations must be provided by the customer. Usually these are: — Ground fault circuit interrupter(GFCI) — Circuit-breaker — Appropriate listed 2-pole main switch. Thunderstorm, lightning, electric voltage A DANGER! DANGER! Mortal danger from lightning and electrical i voltage! If lightning strikes the barrier, contact to the barrier components and direct proximity to the barrier includes mortal danger. Therefore: — Never install the barrier housing and barrier arm during thunderstorms. — Protect yourself in buildings or vehicles. 22 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive =MC Safety ty Hot surfaces A CAUTION! ))) Danger of burns! ... indicates the presence of a hot surface. Non- observance of the safety instructions can lead to minor injuries. This pictogram is fixed on the following component: — Motor in the barrier housing. — Heating (optional) in the barrier housing. 2.6.2 Hazard notes and occupational safety For your own safety and for the protection of the barrier modules,the following information must be observed and complied with: Electric voltage ! DANGER! DANGER! Mortal danger by electric voltage! i Touching live parts can be lethal. Damage to the insulation or to individual components can be lethal. Therefore: — Switch off the power supply immediately in case of damage to the insulation and arrange repair. — Only electrical specialists may carry out work on the electrical system. — Switch off power supply and secure against re- activation before performing any work. Test for absence of voltage! — Never bypass or deactivate fuses. — When replacing fuses observe the correct amperage specification. — Keep moisture and dust away from live parts. Moisture or dust may cause a short circuit. If the electrical connection is established during precipitation, e.g. rain or snow, penetration of moisture must be prevented by suitable measures, such as a protective cover. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 21 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Safety AM MC 2.5 Personal protective equipment It is necessary to wear personal protective equipment when dealing with the barrier so as to minimise health hazards. Before carrying out any work, properly dress in the necessary protective equipment such as work clothes, protective gloves, safety shoes, helmet and wear during work. 2.6 Occupational safety and special dangers The remaining risks resulting from the risk analysis are specified in the following section. Observe the safety notes listed here and the warning notes mentioned in the other chapters of these instructions to reduce health hazards and to avoid dangerous situations. 2.6.1 Danger symbols on the MHTMTM MicroDrive barrier The relevant dangerous areas on the barriers can be identified by the following pictograms: Electric voltage A DANGER! DANGER! " Mortal danger by electric voltage! i ... indicates life threatening situations caused by electric voltage. Non-observance of the safety instructions causes severe injuries or death. Necessary work may only be carried out by an electrical specialist. This pictogram is fixed on the following component: Assembly plate in the barrier housing. 8 WARNING! Danger of crushing! ... indicates the presence of components and items moving towards each other. Non-observance of the safety instructions can lead to severe injuries. This pictogram is fixed on the following component: — At the access points for the lever system on the front and rear of the top assembly plate. — At the access point for the flanged shaft on the front and rear of the top assembly plate. 20 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M M Enc � Safety 2.4 Specialists and operating personnel 2.4.1 Requirements WARNING! - ' Risk of injury in case of inadequate qualification! _ Improper handling can lead to considerable bodily injuries and property damage. Therefore: — Have any activities only carried out by the individuals designated for that purpose. The operating instructions specify the following qualification requirements for the different fields of activity: Instructed people have been instructed during instructions provided by the operator with regard to the work assigned to them and possible hazards arising from improper conduct. Specialised staff are able, due their technical training, knowledge and experience as well as their knowledge of the pertinent regulations able to carry out the work assigned to it and to independently recognize potential hazards. Electrical specialists are able, due to their technical training, knowledge and experiences as well as knowledge of the relevant standards and regulations,to execute tasks on electrical systems and to independently recognize possible hazards. In Germany,the electrical specialist must comply with the provisions of accident prevention regulation BGV A3(e.g. master electrical fitter).Appropriate regulations apply in other countries. The regulations valid there must be observed. The installation is to be made by a professional installer according to NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and Local Code. MHTMTM MicroDrive service experts comply with the requirements of the electricians named here. Additionally,these electricians are trained and authorised by MAGNETIC to perform special repair and service work on MHTMTM MicroDrive barriers. It must be expected that only those people are deployed who carry out their work reliably. People,whose ability to respond is affected, e.g. by drugs, alcohol or medicines, must not be used. Furthermore, the age and profession-specific regulations valid at the operating location must be observed when selecting personnel. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 19 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Aff Safe ty "Enc 2.2 Operator's responsibility The operator must comply with the statutory obligations regarding work safety. In addition to the work safety notes in these operating instructions, the safety, accident prevention and environmental provisions applicable for the area the barrier is used in must be complied with. In particular,the operator must: gather information on applicable work protection provisions. determine additional dangers in a risk assessment. implement the required method of operation of the barrier on site from the operating instructions. y regularly verify throughout the barrier's time of use that the operating instructions drawn up by him comply with the current state of the regulations. adapt the operating instructions to any new provisions, standards and usage conditions-where required. clearly determine the responsibilities for installation, operation, maintenance and cleaning of the barrier. ensure that all employees that are working at or with the barrier have read and understood the operating instructions. Furthermore, the operator must train personnel regarding the use of the barrier at regular intervals and provide information on possible danger. Furthermore,the operator is responsible for: keeping the barrier in perfect technical order and condition at all times. maintaining the barrier according to the maintenance intervals and performing the safety inspections as stipulated. checking all protective facilities for completeness and proper function at regular intervals. The operator is also responsible that the danger area of the barrier arm cannot be accessed by any unauthorised, and in particular not by children, under any circumstances. 2.3 Changes and modifications Changes, modifications and re-builds of the barrier or installation can cause unforeseen danger. A written authorisation of the manufacturer is required before executing any technical changes and extensions on the barrier. 18 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive ""GW` Safety 2.1.2 Non-Intended use Control of pedestrian traffic as contrary to intended use. The barriers must not be used at railway crossings. The barriers are not approved for pedestrian traffic, bicycles or animals. The barriers must not be used in explosive environments. All uses not described as intended use are prohibited. No accessories must be connected or installed if they are not specified expressly according to quantity and characteristics and approved by Magnetic Autocontrol. EM30sm RNING! 1IF-intended Non use is dangerous! Every non-intended use can lead to dangerous situations. Therefore: — Only use barrier as intended. — All specifications in these operating instructions have to be strictly complied with. Any types of claims due to damage arising from improper use are excluded. The operator alone shall be responsible for any damage arising from improper use. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 17 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Aff Safe ty Ens 0m 2 Safety 2.1 Intended use of the barriers The MAGNETIC MHTMTM MicroDrive barrier is intended for installation only on passageway used for vehicles. Pedestrians must be supplied with a separate access opening. The pedestrian access opening shall be designed to promote pedestrian usage. Locate the barrier such that persons will not come in contact with the vehicular passageway during the entire path of travel of the vehicular barrier. The barrier is either controlled by a person in manual operating modes or by access control systems in automatic operating modes and monitored by induction loops and/or safety light barriers. Electrical energy is used exclusively for operating the barrier. The barrier arm weight is balanced out by spring energy. The barrier consists of the barrier housing with drive system and control, as well as the barrier arm. 2.1.1 Intended use for certain road vehicles Certain road vehicles according to chapter 2.1 paragraph 1 need to have sufficiently large metal areas in the vehicle floor area to enable detection by induction loops. 'l`' Other or complementary safety facilities must be provided for road vehicles that cannot be detected by induction looks due to the metal area in the vehicle floor area being too small. 16 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive "�` °""G ` General 1.9 Environmental protection • t NOTICE! Danger for the environment by improper disposal of components or the barrier! In case of improper disposal of components or the barrier,damage to the environment may result. Therefore: — Observe the valid environmental directives. — After appropriate disassembly the parts have to be recycled. — Separate recyclable fraction and feed to recycling. l 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 15 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive General M ESC 1.5 Scope of delivery The scope of delivery comprises: 1 barrier housing incl. drive unit and control 1 Barrier 2 Mounting profiles 2 Warning signs Edge protection Options if applicable Supplied documentation per barrier: These operating instructions. 1.6 Warranty Subject to the condition that the operating instructions are observed, and that no inadmissible operations are carried out on the technical equipment, and that the installation has suffered no mechanical damage, MAGNETIC grants a warranty on all mechanical and electrical components of the product to the extent as stated in its standard terms of sales and delivery or as contractually agreed in writing. MAGNETIC makes no warranties, express or implied, regarding the products, including the value, design, condition, merchantability or fitness for particular purpose or use of the products. 1.7 Customer service Your vendor is available to you for technical information For the address, see invoice, delivery note or the reverse of these instructions. 0 NOTE! In order to enable fast handling note the data of the type plate such as type, serial number, version etc. before calling. 1.8 UL-Declaration UL-Declaration refer to page 177. 14 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive "F" General 1.3 Limitation of liability All specifications and notes in these operating instructions were compiled with consideration to the valid standards and regulations, the state of the art as well as to our long-standing knowledge and experience. The manufacturer is not liable for damages caused by: Non-observance of the operating instructions Improper use _ Deployment of non-trained personnel Arbitrary modifications Technical changes Use of non-approved spare and wear parts. The actual scope of supply may differ from the explanations and illustrations described in this manual in case of special designs, if additional order options are made use of, or due to latest technical changes. Incidentally,the responsibilities agreed upon in the delivery contract,the general terms and conditions as well as the manufacturer's conditions of delivery and the statutory provisions valid at the time of contract conclusion shall apply. In no event shall MAGNETIC be liable for any incidental, indirect, special or consequential damages in connection with the use of the product. 1.4 Copyright protection MAGNETIC retains sole and exclusive ownership of all intellectual property rights with respect to the products. Surrendering the operating instructions to third parties without written permission of the manufacturer is not permitted. 0 NOTE! Content details, texts, drawings, pictures and other illustrations are protected by copyright and are subject to industrial property rights.Any improper use shall be liable to prosecution. Any type and form of duplication—also of extracts—as well as the exploitation and/or communication of the contents are not per- mitted without the manufacturer's written declaration of consent. low 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 13 Barrier MHTMT""MicroDrive AMM General 1.2 Pictogram explanation Warning notes Warning notes are characterised by pictograms in these operating instructions. The warning notes are followed by signal words expressing the scale of the hazard. It is absolutely essential to observe the notes and to proceed with caution in order to prevent accidents as well as bodily injuries and property damage. ! DANGER! DANGER! 1 ... points to an immediately dangerous situation, which leads to death or severe injuries if it is not avoided. WARNING! points to a lead to death possibly dangerous situation that may � or severe injuries if it is not avoided. Adftk CAUTION! ... points to a potentially dangerous situation, which can lead to minor injuries if it is not avoided. NOTICE! ' NOTICE! ... points to a potentially harmful situation, which can lead to property damage if it is not avoided. Hints and recommendations NOTE! 0 ...highlights useful hints and recommendations as well as information for an efficient and trouble-free operation. 12 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAGNETIC General 1 General 1.1 Information regarding the operating instructions These operating instructions provide crucial information on handling of MAGNETIC barriers MHTMTM MicroDrive. Pre-requisite for safe working is the observance of all specified safety notes and instructions. In addition,the local accident prevention regulations valid at the barrier's area of application and general safety regulations have to be complied with. Carefully read the operating instructions before starting any work! They are a product component and must be kept in direct proximity of the barrier,well accessible to the personnel at all times. When passing the barrier on to third parties,the operating instructions must also be handed over. Components from other suppliers may have their own safety regulations and instructions for use. These must also be observed. Programme versions This operating instruction is valid for the following program Control unit MGC and versions. Software number(software#)and software version plug modules (SW version)are indicated in the respective menu "Information"or "Motor GW". Designation Software# i SW version Master Controller Standard 4915,1000 0.7 � _ ,.. .� . ...,. . Motor Gateway Controller 4915,3000 0.6 Detector module 2-channel 4915,3001 0.6 Radio module 433 MHz 4915,3003 0.4 Ethernet Module 4915,3004 0.1 Table 1:Program versions 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 11 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive AM ETIC 'Oak 10 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M Enc Contents 11 Start-up and operation ......................................................151 11.1 Safety ....................................................................151 11.2 Commissioning..........................................................152 11.3 Switching on and off the barrier.................................152 11.4 Putting the barrier temporarily out of operation.........154 12 Maintenance.......................................................................155 12.1 Safety ....................................................................155 12.2 Cleaning ....................................................................156 12.3 Maintenance schedule...............................................157 13 Malfunctions.......................................................................159 13.1 Safety ....................................................................159 13.2 Malfunction table—barrier malfunctions....................160 13.3 Warning and interference messages on the display..163 13.3.1 Warning and interference messages— Logic control (Control unit).........................163 13.3.2 Warning and interference messages— MotorGW...................................................165 13.3.3 Warning and interference messages- Detector......................................................166 13.3.4 Warning and interference messages— AII modules.................................................167 13.4 Reset the barrier........................................................167 13.5 Closing or opening the barrier arm in case of power failure..........................................................168 14 Repair..................................................................................169 14.1 Safety ....................................................................169 14.2 Spare parts................................................................170 14.3 Replacing the barrier arm..........................................170 14.3.1 Barrier boom type"VarioBoom"and "Micro Boom.................................................170 14.3.2 Barrier arm type"MicroBoom-T"................174 15 Decommissioning,disassembly and disposal...............176 16 UL-Declaration....................................................................177 17 Grant of equipment authorization— Radio receiver module......................................................179 18 Appendix.............................................................................181 18.1 Wiring diagrams.........................................................181 18.2 Menu setup................................................................189 Index............................................................................................193 OOW+ 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 9 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Contents AR."E"C 10.5 Parameterising options............................................. 110 10.6 Parameterising values............................................... 111 10.7 Select program mode................................................ 112 10.7.1 Mode 1: Maintained contact...................... 113 10.7.2 Mode 2: Deadman..................................... 114 10.7.3 Mode 3: Pulse control (bistable)................ 115 10.7.4 Mode 4: Two-Pulse control(bistable)........ 116 ' 10.7.5 Automatic modes 5 to 8: Drive direction 1 — overview and differences........................... 117 10.7.6 Automatic Modes 5 to 8: Drive direction 2......................................... 121 10.7.7 Mode"Service".......................................... 122 10.8 Menu"Information"(1).............................................. 123 10.9 Program mode.......................................................... 123 10.10 Menu"Setup.............................................................. 124 10.10.1 Barrier speed............................................. 124 10.10.2 Delays........................................................ 124 10.10.3 Cut off angle.............................................. 126 10.10.4 Inputs......................................................... 126 10.10.5 Outputs...................................................... 126 10.10.6 Vend count................................................. 127 10.10.7 Impact settings........................................... 130 10.10.8 Start-up behaviour..................................... 131 10.10.9 Power failure.............................................. 135 10.10.10 Closure by light barrier.............................. 136 10.10.11 Master/Slave.............................................. 136 10.11 Menu"Attachments".................................................. 137 10.11.1 Signal light................................................. 137 10.11.2 Boom contact settings............................... 140 10.11.3 Boom locking............................................. 141 10.12 Menu"Service".......................................................... 141 10.13 Menu "Information".................................................... 142 10.14 Menu "Motor GW(Gateway)..................................... 142 10.15 Menu"Detector 1 (A-B).............................................. 143 10.15.1 Check the working frequency of the induction loops................................. 144 10.15.2 Reconciling and setting the operating frequency of the induction loop.................. 145 10.16 Menu "Detector 2 (C-D)"........................................... 147 10.17 Menu'Radio control" ................................................ 147 10.18 Factory Settings........................................................ 150 8 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive 1/ ""'wenc Contents 8.6 Assemble housing .......................................................66 8.7 Assemble light barrier post..........................................68 8.8 Assemble safety light barrier.......................................69 8.8.1 Assemble transmitter....................................69 8.8.2 Assemble receiver........................................70 8.9 Assemble barrier arm type"VarioBoom.......................71 8.10 Assemble edge protection...........................................71 8.11 Assembling flange and barrier arm..............................72 8.11.1 Type"VarioBoom"and "MicroBoom"...........72 8.11.2 Barrier arm type"MicroBoom-T"..................75 8.12 Conversion"left version"—"right version" (VarioBoom and MicroBoom) ......................................78 8.13 Check and set the balancing springs in the lever system.......................................................82 8.13.1 Setting balancing springs.............................83 8.13.2 Overview table balancing springs ................84 8.14 Align barrier housing and light barrier post..................86 8.15 Installing warning signs................................................87 8.16 Check assembly and installation.................................87 9 Electrical connection...........................................................88 9.1 Safety...........................................................................88 9.2 Installing electrical protective devices .........................91 9.3 Connecting the mains supply.......................................91 9.4 Connect customer's control lines(signalling devices).93 9.4.1 Connecting safety devices...........................94 9.4.2 Plausibility check of the safety devices........94 9.4.3 Connecting safety loop.................................95 9.4.4 Connect and test the safety light barriers.....96 9.4.5 Connecting emergency opening contacts....96 9.4.6 Digital inputs.................................................97 9.4.7 Digital outputs and output relays..................99 9.5 Checking the electrical connection............................104 10 Parameterising control unit..............................................105 10.1 Safety ....................................................................105 10.2 Control elements control unit.....................................105 10.3 Displays on the control unit........................................106 10.4 Symbols in the display...............................................107 10.4.1 Control button functions.............................107 10.4.2 Current state of the barrier.........................108 10.4.3 Current program mode...............................109 10.4.4 Current state of the induction loops...........109 10.4.5 Further symbols..........................................109 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 7 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Contents Aff Enc 4.3 Parking........................................................................37 4.3.1 Dimensions and weight...............................37 4.3.2 Electrical connection....................................38 4.3.3 Operating conditions....................................38 4.3.4 Operating times...........................................38 4.4 Toll...............................................................................39 4.4.1 Dimensions and weight...............................39 4.4.2 Electrical connection....................................40 4.4.3 Operating conditions....................................40 _ 4.4.4 Operating time.............................................40 4.5 Control unit..................................................................41 4.6 Plug-in module"Detector A—B.....................................42 4.7 Plug-in module'Radio"...............................................42 5 Design and function............................................................43 5.1 Design.........................................................................43 5.1.1 Access and Parking.....................................43 5.1.2 Access Pro H...............................................44 5.1.3 Toll...............................................................45 5.2 Function ......................................................................46 6 Transport and storage........................................................47 6.1 Safety..........................................................................47 6.2 Transport inspection....................................................48 6.3 Transport.....................................................................49 6.4 Storage........................................................................49 7 Design notes for induction loops......................................50 8 Assembly and installation..................................................53 8.1 Safety..........................................................................53 8.2 Required steps............................................................55 8.3 Foundation and empty conduits..................................56 8.3.1 Foundation and empty conduits for the barrier....................................................57 8.3.2 Foundation and empty conduits for light barrier post...........................................59 8.4 Assembly and installation of induction loops..............61 8.4.1 Directions for the assembly and installation of induction loops.......................61 8.4.2 Induction loops.............................................63 8.4.3 Testing induction loops................................63 8.4.4 Installing induction loops in bitumen, asphalt, or concrete.....................................63 8.4.5 Installing induction loops under interlocking stonepaving ................................................65 8.5 Unpacking...................................................................66 6 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Mc Contents Contents 1 General..................................................................................11 1.1 Information regarding the operating instructions.........11 1.2 Pictogram explanation.................................................12 1.3 Limitation of liability......................................................13 1.4 Copyright protection.....................................................13 1.5 Scope of delivery.........................................................14 1.6 Warranty......................................................................14 T 1.7 Customer service.........................................................14 1.8 UL-Declaration.............................................................14 1.9 Environmental protection.............................................15 2 Safety....................................................................................16 2.1 Intended use of the barriers.........................................16 2.1.1 Intended use for certain road vehicles.........16 2.1.2 Non-Intended use.........................................17 2.2 Operator's responsibility..............................................18 2.3 Changes and modifications.........................................18 2.4 Specialists and operating personnel............................19 2.4.1 Requirements...............................................19 2.5 Personal protective equipment....................................20 2.6 Occupational safety and special dangers....................20 2.6.1 Danger symbols on the MHTMTM MicroDrive barrier..........................20 2.6.2 Hazard notes and occupational safety.........21 2.7 Danger area.................................................................28 3 Identification.........................................................................29 3.1 Type plate....................................................................29 3.2 Type code....................................................................30 4 Technical data......................................................................31 4.1 Access.........................................................................31 4.1.1 Dimensions and weight................................31 4.1.2 Electrical connection ....................................32 4.1.3 Operating conditions ....................................32 4.1.4 Operating times............................................33 4.2 Access Pro H...............................................................34 4.2.1 Dimensions and weight................................34 4.2.2 Electrical connection ....................................35 4.2.3 Operating conditions ....................................35 4.2.4 Operating times............................................36 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 5 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive MAM t5pw2 ' 4 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive M MAG EnC �° Important Safety Instructions Important Safety Instructions Read and follow all instructions. Never let children operate or play with barrier controls. Keep the remote control (where provided) away from children. } Personnel should keep away from a barrier arm in motion and keep the moving barrier arm in sight until it is completely closed or opened. No one should cross the path of a moving barrier arm. Test the barrier system monthly. After adjusting the force or the limit of travel, retest the barrier system. Failure to adjust and retest the barrier system properly can increase the risk of injury or death. Keep barrier properly maintained. Read the owner's manual. Have a qualified service person make repairs to barrier hardware. The barrier is for vehicles only. Pedestrians must use separate entrance. Save these instructions. 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 3 MAGNETIC Automation Corporation 3160 Murrell Road Rockledge, Florida, 32955 USA Tel.: +1 321 635 8585 Fax.:+1 321 635 9449 E-Mail: info @ac-magnetic.com Internet:www.ac-magnetic.com 2 5815,5001 US/Version 02.66 MAGNETIC ,AM& NTROU" w Operating Instructions Barrier MHTMTM MicroDrive Aw Doc-ID:5815,5001 US Version: 02.6 i`T'y WU . 1 °V 1 � 46, ��i` t r �i�11dLw,?L L<1 � •{`'rt r c '-'-� •. i•i 1 I S I j ��•-'�+ri.� I r � -s or Jr ��t 11't��„ Vf'� ��ti ✓'r{/Y ilk I� !,r r j•VattL'rk3:d`tt�f�..�: +y,�i�' r;h'Tfr� ; n 4y s;l �{ I S r d r �� ,�c��t�� tu �• 1 � �¢•��yx� e. �i�. d �r1��s�s• '-:•i .�.'rt _ ii I ' ,�� (t}�"�r'�4��. ��a '�.'fJ 7.M��t�,,.. �,�" ;�;jF��. �r��'fap,Y"��.w.��1�•F�t,�'p . � �" •, t ( 5 � (i � 1' Ito ytctiil �y({tK"trPi�' �+, C3{t 4,��a9,+t � + 81'C i tj' [��I tt- y��'�'• �L� 'L�y � `'� �y .i � i (_ � `Wr•r<Si`�71 {�'�' •�>;�t� �.� c ,, y + �� I'�' r�rt�*tit ��}v� 9,:�.•"tA (I '.r { Tt 7 tr fir' rtt �v r `�r�F`�"' "e-.' 1fFf•�,+1_ »3. � t( (�F�>LCro�Y� ��r �w, 'R �'� �. �IJ+�1, •, v I' �� • (;� + t f�,t �.�` 111,.1 �. �°j11 � ' d:� ys.�,r�4•I!%f ♦ �ytyt "� �i' . �, rR �. t'.A, � �. +„ +��?: 1� tSrltSt. .. r} i `� ''•(' - Of �. '�°f.�F?i�h,�1(-�}. j'!1" ai i �i. y'f f',}�" 1h'Ii`' '.. : �9w''g'.. �t'ti,"Y C �i A V`•t `+l '^"< 1 r �`.`'` �� 'ri �°mil ;�� t { k IrJ 1�. �iy.•Y 1 �{ s t�IN. �s4 r'•1_. f',.' , I `' I,I's•,i� , r s �.' F, 41A 111 y { e � i .._ ►rrs �1 ,f i'.:: ��,la`�� f�'1�` r u 57+�tih�t�t��r,°'$' :�' -4 aa +yra i.jr.1 7� •,s r--- `: 1 __ __ -�.7,.__.._.�. �D't41"{�tilYf�'�{ y�rL �a °,y�,(+�,':s,_ +, .;+ E)rlPIL,"'FU�l,•Yr„� t ti�,t`[ 4'��",L4F 4. Z. Imo"^ rr .lt �W"!,`'' tr .+� .. • ! �_ �-; 1 1{, `".�E`rr}°�`��ih��}}�l��f,�11rf,��'��, s. `�,, i,�• �� ; ��"to 't%i��,t �`�I'Y�l't�l e4��-��rYl;'��,1'�`d��. ��r,. �•'� � I I�I'( t-.,..�-,+ ti� ,��p`I 'I�fi�i`�� t j�� K41 a r It,ell .., I Qx y , y - ... MAGNETIC Technical Data Magnetic.Access/-L Magnetic.Access Pro/-L Lane width max. 12 ft/15 ft 12 ft/20 ft Opening/closing time 2.2 s/4.0 s 1.3 s/4.0 s ._........... ........_.._. ....... _ _.._............. ........... Power consumption max. 25W/50W i 95W/25W _..--- - - - - .._...... .. -- ..........----- =- - ----....- -......_.... Duty cycle 100% ...... .--_......... ___........ Supply voltage Wide voltage range 85-264 V AC __.... ..... __.._._. ......__. ..... ......... _.. Frequency 50-60 Hz ......- ....... -- .._.. ....... ... .......... ..........-- Driveunit MHTM-MicroDrive Housing dimensions(WXDXH) 12.4 x 14.2 x 36.0 in .. - -...- --- ....... .........- - - -- --- . Weight without boom 88.2 1 b .._... --_. __.. Housing design Powder-coated aluminum _._ ..-- ........_............ - ... -- -- ._ ................ ........ Base frame --Powder-coated stainless steel Protection class IP 54 --------...._.....----- I------- Compliant with UL 325,2004/108/EC,2006/95/EC,2006/42/EC,CE Temperature range -22 to+131 F . .......... .................................................... ....... . ...... _._ . ......-- ...... ._. .-_._.......- Features Magnetic.Access/-L Magnetic.Access Pro/-L Standard colors RAL 2000(orange),RAL 9010(white) 4variants -_._.... .-.-. ...--...---- -...... Special painting O ---- ---- -- ---------- • O VarloBoorn • - . ........ _... - _.. ___._.... - O ._.._._. . .......... __. ...._... Extension set VarioBoom ........ _._.. _ Control unit MGC MGC Pro _..-- -- --- -- - - --- - - ---- j integrated 2-channel loop detector • • Control unit modularly extendable Radio control and additional 2-channel loop • detector only ......- ....__._.__. _...____.... _ Variable 1/0 assignment • o Number of digital inputs 8 8 -- .. a -- --- 3 Number of relay/digital outputs 6/4 6/4 0 s - - - ---._ --- 3 Closing/opening times selectable •/- •/• ... - r Solar/battery option O O Extended accessories j - O --- ----... ---- ....-- ---. --- ---- _._...- - -- -- Specified number of cycles 10 Mio 10 Mio m Warranty 2 years 2 years - - __._ ._ . -._......._.. _-_._. . .................- -_ . .._.._.... M O N • Standard O .y ' _ O Optionally available ■{/, - Not available �� reddnt design award n unnner 2013 - www.ac-magnetic.com MAGNETIC _. .'AU, TOEONTROU' MHTM'""MicroDrive �� Magnetic.Access Magnetic.Access barriers were specifically designed for the use in low to high frequented sites, e.g. industrial sites, residential »high basic functionality buildings or small parking areas.Additionally,access roads with a lane width of up to 6.Om can be efficiently and reliably secured. »safe control unit(EN 13849) The Magnetic.Access range does not only offer long-life cycle, »80%more connectivity(1/0,TCP/IP, great reliability and quality but impresses with sophisticated and RS-485,etc.) enduring design,extremely low operational costs, high ease of � use and almost maintenance-free technology. »high ease of use/max.accessibility Depending on your demand,you may choose between 3 differ- »only 25W power consumption ent barrier models:While the Magnetic.Access models are the (Magnetic.Access) all-round barriers,the Pro models offer more functionality and options.The Select models offer all customizing options at favor- » 10 Mio opening and closing able prices. movements 1 i Design and quality MHTM'°'MicroDrive barriers impress with sophisticated and enduring design.The modularly designed housing made of extruded aluminum profiles and a base frame made of stainless steel i (both powder-coated)offers best protection against corrosion. The MHTM''product line is winner of the red dot award:product design 2012. Control unit The control unit MGC/MGC Pro is compliant with EN 13849.It is located directly underneath the top cover and can be accessed from all sides.Configuring the barrier is easily accomplished via the LCD's intuitive user interface that can be navigated with just 4 push-buttons. v .o v MA 3 Drive unit The drive unit of MHTM'""MicroDrive is not only astonishing because of its small dimensions.You ; also get a high torque with an extremely minimized power consumption.The high torque guaran- tees best operation even under severe weather conditions(heavy winds,snow,etc.). s The motor,motor control and gearing are all combined in one compact drive unit. v M VarioBoom 0 The VarioBoom concept enhances the visibility of the barrier boom which may be even more in- creased installing optionally available accessories. It comes equipped with a foamed edge protec- tion which offers best protection against damages and harm to people. N O Thanks to the modular design of the barrier boom single elements can be replaced in case of dam- age. www.ac-magnetic.com TCL ' ® . - '� • • • • • 'Winng Diagram Wiring r . - Switches Available for •Lilt the cabinet on lhelop edge of the back panel and shift fonwerd,make wlrs o c, o Immediate Shipping. connections according m the instructions,then replace the back and Me lwo retaining B Order it TODAY, •Remove the back panel of the unit by _ screws removed in step one. unscrewing Me avo retaining screws on eaa rare a.W/ the bottom of the unit M.xmewPrde Receive it TOMORROW! © No7o'�-adrml..�h ten fasteners ar dislod back penal. No tal chips from inside sign rabinet, o may void warranty. ' •Mount the back panel to the appropriate ( building face with four(4)fasteners, g (Not Supplied) E [ single Gang Dauble Gang Triple Gang Pow Gang Single/Double Post Mounts Dual Angle Mount Ceiling/Side Mount = = M Fwe Grp six Gew Sr Gang -PwpmM MouNw01'TapNMP.-'f mtoLeo` _ Green Light — c Green Light c ComMMr ercXel—� Frbmr ��„. t ran wum v Ephl Gang Nine Gasp 6tMxtl i�rmhl tum smpuxq reskM &qyj"; 3Position '2 2Peeilkm e �i Prl vmne� slnpePr� �cadmi� YRVIeY Switch t? Switch re rwl.m.n wum 3K°c; `adri •. e""m0n ore lam W,nwaidr. c'""" emkPUd s Red Light © Note:Make appropriate wiring er.Plale�t t Custom angles available. � ��, connections per local code. 7 20 VAC ONLY — Direct Burial Base Plate Projection Post 30°Angle 45°Angle Ceiling Mount Side Mount _ _ — Neutral from Souma Note:This sign is intended to be installed in accordance with the To Wire Dual Message Signs Load from source requirements of Article 600 of the 9 9 To Wire Single Message Signs National Electric Code and/or Optional Mounting Hardware Available for Immediate Shipping. Cannmt Blmk Messes,A primary lead and connrt Red Maness.B primary lead I.vfth pole. other applicable local codes,This Red 1,1_5'B primary lead to oppoeha switch pole. •conn..twhile neutrd wire opp.e to rrikh pale and Order it TODAY, Receive it TOMORROW! D.^nmtwhae neutrA trite npp..ee,llh pd.rq meap,y.k.dt includes proper grounding and m soppy'k-Lit •Connedgrmnd wire bonding of the sign. Cannedgroundwire TCL7161NST06 Direct-View LED Traffic Controller Product View NOTE:Sign image may not exactly represent the finished product.For illustration purposes only. TCL718GR-220 PRODUCT NUMBER 5898 � CABINET DIMENSIONS C Us 7"H x 18"W x 2.5"D ILLUMINATION SOURCE Super bright,wide viewing angle LEDs Available in green,red,blue,amber,and white LEDs Messages"blankout"when turned off,eliminating confusion Long life,solid state lighting ELECTRICAL Integrated solid state power supply Standard Voltage:120 VAC,Optional Voltages:9-36 V,240 VAC,277 VAC Maximum amps per lighted message(at 120 V)shown in the table below T UL/CUL approved for wet locations CONSTRUCTION Faces:Single Faced Sign Extrusions(TCL):Slim line,corrosion resistant all weather frame,2.5"thick. Face Material:Impact Resistant,smoked tinted Polycarbonate 1/8"thick. FINISH Standard Cabinet Color:Duranodic Bronze Custom colors available upon request ; 18,. I--2.5°—� MESSAGE COLOR HEIGHT AMPS OPEN Green Wide Angle Oval 3.5" 0.03 FULL Red Wide Angle Oval 3.5" 0.02 Signal-Tech 4985 Pittsburgh Ave. Erie,PA 16509 Phone:(877)547-9900 I i Fax:(814)835-2300 Email:sales @signal-tech.com Website:www.signal-tech.com Proudly Made in the USA Copyright(C)2014 Signal-Tech REV 0 1 08172011 I KMR Version 1(2012-09-2415:31:19) TCL LED SERIES @ TCL Dual Message TCL Single Message Installation instructions cus Remove this sheet prior to final installation Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram Wall Mount Switches Available for Install Instruction aadrar •Lift the cabinet an the top edge of the beck panel and shift forward,make wire Immediate Shipping. connec"ansacel1,stetoMeinsVUC"ens,Men replace the beck and the two retaining Order it TODAY •Remove the hack panel of the unit by __ _ screws removed n step ono. t unscrewing the two retaining screws in a°=k p°� 42e v/'r Me bottom of the unit. _ Nae�,�r�° — - Receive it TOMORROW! © Note:Do not overtighten fasteners or distort back panel. Note:Clear any metal chips from inside sign cabinet,: . failure to do so may void warranty. i •Mount the back panel to Me epptcpr%te building Lace with four(4)fasteners. (Not Supplied) A ( y 81 Single Gang Double Garg Triple Genii Four Gang Single/Double Post Mounts Dual Angle Mount Ceiling/Side Mount m luwat•aa!; -..... Iwan.t..ar;,' ® Six Gwng Swen Gang ergen av m ` 'Cwd7t'DNIr t .. 1 'f bkM'YMrf d- ° Green Lr9ht Green Lrght r v n �sraeenPot a rcss�ae a a�nar�x a�r ag,�r .a rea �ares�_ � °U Eight Gepg ina Ge N F s e 3 $ n Z n Switch Switch caoa rmi re o e m Note:Make appropriate wi ring c.p,. connetions local cde.Red Li 9ht Cum angles available. 120 VAC ONLY Direct Burial Sase Plate Projection Post 30'Angle 45°Angle Ceiling Mount Side Mount Ne Val Vom Sourc Note:This Sign is intended to be j ..,..... .. „....; ......., .,. ...._ a.....w ... _w .:._.... . ..............�_...,.. installed In accordance with the Load from Source requirements of Article 600 of the To Wire Dual Message Signs To Wire Single Message Signs National Electric Code andlor Optional Mounting Hardware Available for Immediate Shipping. Cannot Slak MeeeegeA pd.,lam em Dnnneat Red M•ssege S pdmsy lead toswiRh pde, other applicable local codes.This Rail Message a primary lam m opposile switch poles. .Connectwhite�wutrel wire opposite swine pole arm includes proper grounding and Order it TODAY, Receive it TOMORROW! °°"n�tw"�°° wre °°dew d^pd -G.n ground to°upph'=ircuit •Conned ground wire bonding of the sign. •Connect groom wire --- - TCL7181NST06 Direct-View LED Traffic Controller Product View NOTE:Sign image may not exactly represent the finished product.For illustration purposes only. TCL1212RG-175DS PRODUCT NUMBER 7577 CABINET DIMENSIONS C us 12"Hx12"WX2.5"D ILLUMINATION SOURCE Super bright,wide viewing angle LEDs Available in green,red,blue,amber,and white LEDs Messages"blankout"when turned off,eliminating confusion Long life,up to 100,000+hours ELECTRICAL Integrated solid state power supply Standard Voltage:120 VAC,Optional Voltages:9-36 V,240 VAC,277 VAC Maximum amps per lighted message(at 120 V)shown in the table below UL/CUL approved for wet locations CONSTRUCTION Faces:Single Faced Sign Extrusions(TCL):Slim line continuous,corrosion resistant,aluminum housing 2.5"deep Face Material:Impact Resisatant,smoke tinted Polycarbonate 1/8"thick. FINISH Standard Cabinet Color:Duranodic Bronze 12" Custom colors available upon request MESSAGE COLOR HEIGHT AMPS X Red Wide Angle Oval 9" 0.03 DOWN ARROW Green Wide Angle Oval 9" 0.05 12" 2.5'-� Trans-Tech 4999 Pittsburgh Ave. Erie,PA 16509 Phone:(888)811-7010 Fax:(814)836-8401 E .M Email:sales @transportation-tech.com Website:www.transportation-tech.com Proudly Made in the USA Copyright(C)2011 Trans-Tech REV 0(11182006 I SD • . HTMI VIKING PRODUCT MANUAL •• • COMMUNICATION & SECURITY SOLUTIONS ' Control Relay Contacts Remotely The RC-2A Remote Controller provides remote �II relay operation from any standard Touch Tone telephone. The controller is designed to be installed either lo- cally or remotely. For local installations the RC-2A R1_&#OTE TOUCH TONE can be installed in parallel on any analog commu- nications path,such as analog C.O.lines or analog PABX/KSU stations and will passively monitor for Touch Tone commands. For off-premise applications, the RC-2A will an- swer analog C.O.lines or PABX/KSU stations after a selectable ring delay. A field programmable ac- cess code can be programmed to prevent unau- thorized usage, and then the RC-2A can be Note:For doorstrike control with Viking W-Series activated to allow remote relay operation. Doorboxes, see Viking model SRC-1 (DOD#175) or C-10008(DOD# 168). Features Applications • Programmable access code Remote Control of: • Normally open or normally closed relay • High security building entry • Selectable relay closure times • Heating/cooling equipment • Pumps and fans • Selectable ring delay(1,2, 6,or 15) • Security systems • Gates • Universal 12-24V AC/DC power input • Lighting • Easy installation with screw terminals • PABX/KSU reset and dip switch programming Specifications • Automatic disconnect or return to secure Power: 120VAC/ 12VDC 500mA UL listed mode after 60 seconds adapter provided, alternative power input: • Power multiple units from one adapter 12-24V AC/DC 200mA minimum Dimensions: 133mm x 89mm x 44mm • One year warranty (5.25"x 3.5"x 1.75") Shipping Weight: .9 kg(2 Ibs) Environmental: -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 160°F)with 5%to 95% non-condensing hu- www.vikingelectronics.com midity Information: (715)386-8861 Relay Contact Ratings: 5A @ 30VDC/ 250VAC Connections: (1) 8 position screw terminal block Operation When the"Call"button is pressed,the E-30 phone goes off-hook,and dials a pre-programmed telephone number.The front panel LED will light any time the phone is off hook, and flash to show dialing. In the event that the line is busy or there is a ring-no answer, the unit can be programmed to call additional phone numbers. The phone then cycles through up to 5 pre- programmed speed dial numbers until the call is answered. The E-30 will hang up on CPC, silence, busy signal, return to dial tone, time out or Touch Tone command (*#). If programmed to auto-answer, the E-30 will also answer any incoming call. Applications C-20006 Advanced Door/Gate and Entry Phone Controller The C-20006 allows up to 4 entry phones to call into your existing residential or business phones or phone system. Tenants may answer the call, converse with the visitor and activate a contact closure to control electronic gates or door strikes. The C-20006 provides "Caller ID," "Call Waiting ID" and "Call Waiting" tone when the phone line is in use. Tenants may gain entry at each gate by entering a Touch Tone keyless entry code. Tenants may call out to each entry phone for monitoring purposes. An auxiliary input is also available for connecting a common garage door opener/receiver and auxiliary keyless entry keypads. See the C-20006 Technical Practice for complete installation instructions, DOD# 156. VIKING© MODEL C-20006 120V AC xuwox,wi:mss ADVANCED DOORIGATE AND ENTRY PHONE CONTROLLER 13.8V n (1 Adapter U � (included) ;3 S °g G 85 a I rti li r`t rL, r, ra1 H, r'1 r hl fi z , r F-1 as nuiausia r moo aiv Optional Doorbell Switch To Standard Eo if6� °' Eo 1-001p E�o� ` (not included,see Programming Analog Touch `Ea section M on page 9) Tone House C.O./Phone Earth s se s seo Phone(s) Line Input Ground -_____ Optional Postal Lock o or____-_.__ (Optional) (not included) Entry Phone 4 To Entry (E-30 shown, Phone 4 not included) 5A @30VDCl (Power typically not 250VAC requiredforgatecontrollers) maximum Doorstrike/ Magnetic Lock - A contact closure output is available for each entry phone.An auxiliary output is also available. it ca.+1 Entry Phone 2 Entry Phone 1 Entry Phone 3 (E-30 shown) (E-40-PB shown, (E-60-1314 shown, not included) not included) ^Product Support Line... 795.386.8666 Fax Back Line... 715.386.4345 Due to the dynamic nature of the product design,the information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.Viking Electronics,and its affiliates and/or subsidiaries assume no responsibility for errors and omissions contained in this information.Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes. DOD#212 Printed in the U.S.A. ZF303260 Rev A Setting F - Lap Counter With the lap counter disabled(factory setting),if the E-30 is programmed to dial Touch Tone Setting F the next number on ring-no-answer and/or busy signal (see page 5 and 6),the E-30 will continuously call its programmed phone numbers forever until the call 0 Disabled* is answered. 1-9 Lap count = 1-9 times The lap counter is a programmable counter that determines how many times the E-30 will cycle through its list of up to 5 emer- gency number(or up to 3"Info"phone numbers), before it stops the dialing process and hangs up.When all of the programmed phone numbers have been dialed, the lap counter is incremented and the dialing process repeats. When the lap counter has been met, the dialing process stops and the E-30 hangs up.*Note: This feature is disabled in the factory default setting. G. Assisted Programming When attempting to program the E-30 phone, if the phone number of the line it is connected to is not known,the phone can be set to automatically call Viking technical support for assistance. With DIP switch 3 set to OFF (programming mode), pushing the CALL button will cause the E-30 phone to call Viking,whether it be connected directly to a CO line, or behind a"dial 9" PBX. The E-30 phone will first dial 9,and then listen for second dial tone;if detected it will continue to dial Viking's assisted programming phone number. If a second dial tone is not detected, it then knows is not behind a PBX, so it will momentarily hang up and then directly dial Viking's assisted programming phone number.Since this is a long distance phone call,the line must be capable of plac- ing long distance calls for the call to go through. When finished programming, it is very important to set DIP switch 3 back to ON (normal operating mode), and place a test emergency call to be sure all programming was done properly. Warning:Failure to set DIP switch 3 back to ON when finished programming will cause the E-30 phone to only call Viking Technical Support, instead of your programmed emergency number. H. DIP Switch Programming/Speaker and Microphone Adjustments Two POTS are provided to increase or decrease speaker volume and microphone sensitivity. In certain noisy locations the microphone sensitivity may need to be decreased as shown below. Caution: Setting the microphone gain too high may cause distorted audio, prevent the distant party from breaking over and inhibit second number redialing. Switch Switch Description Microphone Speaker A B Sensitivity Volume ON ON Normal audio detection OFF OFF Increase audio detect sensitivity for low level lines. Useful 1 \+ in applications in which voice or busy signals have trouble Standard breaking over the speaker. ON DIP Switch Position Description OFF A B 1 ON "CALL"button alternately connects and disconnects EWP ae calls(factory default) AB O© 1 OFF "CALL"button connects calls only 2 ON Incoming calls answered(factory setting) OFF ON 2 OFF Incoming calls are not answered Standard 3 ON Normal operation mode(factory setting) ON aa� 3 OFF Learn mode -Any incoming calls are automatically entered OFF a into the programming mode(no security code required). Use 1 2 3 this option if you have forgotten your security code.Any out EWP aaa bound call will dial Viking Technical Support(see section G). 1 [EF11 Warning:When finished programming,set this switch back to the ON 2 position, otherwise the E-30 phone will only call Viking Technical 3 Support instead of your programmed emergency number. OFF ON 1. Programming Examples To Program the E-30 Phone... Step 1 - Step 2-Enter Digits: See Section A ...to store 123456 as the security code Enter Programming 123456#19 ...to store a Touch Tone 9,a four second pause and then a pulse Enter Programming 9*7*6 3 3 3 4 4 4 4#0 0 dialed 333-4444 in the first speed dial position ...to store 555-1234 in the second speed dial position Enter Programming 5551234#01 Setting C - Silence Time Out Touch Silence This feature selects the length of time that calls will remain connected without voice activity. Tone Time out Programmable in increments of 10 seconds up to a maximum of 90 seconds (Touch Tones 0 Disabled 1 - 9). To disable the silence time out, program 0 in this location. Use chart at the right. 2 20 sec * Note: The factory default is 40 seconds. 3 30 sec 4 40 sec* 5 50 sec 6 60 sec Setting D - Dial Next Number on Ring No Answer 7 70 sec Touch Tone Setting D 8 80 sec If enabled and a ring-no-answer is detected, the E-30 1 or 0 Disabled 9 90 sec phone will dial the next programmed speed dial num- 2,3,4...9 Dials second number after ber, and continue to cycle through the emergency 2,3,4...9 rings respectively numbers until a call is completed. *Note: Factory set to redial if not answered after 7 rings. Setting E - Dial Next Number on Busy If enabled and a busy is detected, the E-30 phone will dial the next programmed Touch Tone Setting E speed dial number, and continue to cycle through the emergency numbers until a 1 Disabled call is completed. * Notes: This feature is enabled in the factory default setting. If 2 Enabled* the busy signal is interrupted with a promotional message, contact your central office to have it removed. Setting F- Pulse Dialing Rate(Pulses per Second) Touch Tone Setting F The E-30 phone is capable of different pulse dialing speeds. * Note: The factory 1 10 pps* default setting is 10pps (pulses per second). 2 20 pps > F. Miscellaneous Options (memory location #17) Dial: A + B + C + D + E + F + # + 1 + 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 Factory Default Setting: 0 + 0 + 0 + 2 + 1 + 0 Enter Settings Here: Not Applicable (enter 0) I I I A B C D E F Hang-up on Return to Dial Tone 0 0 0 #17 Panasonic Mode Lap Counter Settings A/ B/C - Not Applicable Setting D - Hang Up on Return to Dial Tone Touch Tone Setting D If enabled and a return dial tone is detected,the E-30 will hang up. 1 Disabled *Note: The factory default setting is enabled. 2 Enabled* Setting E- Panasonic Mode The E-30 can be programmed to recognize the double ring cadence that is typical of Touch Tone Setting E Panasonic phone systems. If the E-30 is connected to a Panasonic extension, (or any other system that provides a double ring cadence)enable"Panasonic Mode"will allow for proper 1 Disabled* call progress detection. 2 Enabled *Note: This feature is disabled in the factory default setting. C. Security Code (memory location #19) The security code allows the user/installer to program the E-30 phone while DIP switch 3 is in the ON (normal) posi- Alm The factory set security code is 845464 (V-1-K-1-N-G). It is recommended that the factory set security code be changed. Example: To store 123456 as the security code: Step 1. Access programming as shown is Programming section A. Enter Your Security Code Here: Step 2. Enter 123456 #19.. #19 Step 3. Hang-up. Note: The security code must be 6 digits and cannot include a *or a#. D. Speed Dial Numbers (Memory Locations#00 -#04) Note: Up to 20 digits can be stored in each dial position. Special features such as pause, mode change, Touch Tone *and# count as single digits. The speed dial number programmed in location #00 is the telephone or extension To Program: Enter: number that is dialed when the "Call' button is first pressed. Additional speed dial numbers will be dialed when there is no answer or a busy signal is detected and the * ** next number redial features are activated. The E-30 will cycle through the pro- # *# grammed speed dial numbers until answered. To program, enter the desired speed 4 second pause *7 dial number followed by the memory location number(#00 -#04). switch to pulse mode *6 To clear a speed dial location, simply enter the memory location (#00 -#04) alone. 0, 1, 2...9 0, 1, 2...9 The E-30 is factory set with no speed dial number programmed. E. Timing/Dialing Options (Memory Location #18) There are six positions in the timing/dialing options. To program these options, enter the six desired timing/dialing dig- its followed by#18. The six available timing/dialing options are defined as shown below. Dial: A + B + C + D + E + F + # + 1 + 8 1 1 Factory Default Setting: 2 + 3 + 4 + 7 + 2 + 1 Enter Timing/Dialing Settings Here: Talk/Listen Delay I A B C D E F Call Length F 7 #18 Silence Time Out Dial Next Number on Ring No Answer Dial Next Number on Busy Pulse Dial Speed Touch Talk/Listen Tone Delay 1 .1 sec Setting A- Talk/Listen Delay 2 .2 sec~ 3 .3 sec This feature selects switching time between talk and listen modes 4 .4 sec (VOX switching time). Use chart at the right. *Note: The factory 5 .5 sec default is .2 seconds. 6 .6 sec Touch Call Length 7 .7 sec Tone Time Out 8 .8 sec 9 .9 sec 0 Disabled 1 1 min Setting B - Call Length Time Out 2 2 min 3 3 min' This feature selects the maximum length of time that calls can be connected. Programmable 4 4 min in increments of 1 minute up to a maximum of 9 minutes (Touch Tones 1 -9). Program 0 in 5 5 min 6 6 min this location to disable the call length time out. With the call length disabled,the E-30 phone 7 7 min must rely on CPC, busy, reorder, silence or return dialtone to hang-up. Use chart at the far 8 8 min right. *Note: The factory default is 3 minutes. 9 9 min B. Wiring the E-30 Phone Board 5.0" Optional C-20008 Advanced Door Optional C-200 or C-250 Single Entry F 3.63"--=. Entry Controller(not included) Phone Controller(not included) VIKING® MODEL VIKING® MoDELc-zoo Rear View of O p ' the E-30 hog 0®® °B E C.O.Line p .,a. �rr�,wa�. n V i si° g a ; ss�w 0 Om°B IfIIIIIIIIL I l m 5.0„ CaEa or Analog 0 10 8 PABX/KSU € Ring Station 3.63 19 ,i a. ) b, ..Gel-Filled ° (ne lea a) Butt Connectors o0 ED El Earth Ground Rea(rting) o (optional) O O :............°------...........------..........................or----------------------------or... Green(Tip) *Note: When installing a line powered phone on a low voltage and/or low loop current phone system extension,a TB84B Talk Battery Booster may be required, see DOD#632. **Note: The gel-filled(water-tight)butt connectors are designed for insulation displacement on 19-26 gauge wire with a maximum insulation of 0.082 inches. Cut off bare wire ends prior to terminating. ***Note: To increase surge protection,loosen the PCB mounting screw labeled Q (as shown above)and fasten a wire with spade terminal(included) from the mounting screw to Earth Ground(grounding rod, water pipe,etc.) Programming A. Accessing the Programming Mode The E-30 phone can be programmed from any Touch Tone phone using a C.O. line, analog PABX/KSU station, or a DLE-2008 Line Simulator. For more information on the DLE-20013, see DOD#605. 1. Using the Security Code Step 1. Move DIP switch 2 to the ON position (sets unit to answer incoming calls-see section H). Step 2. From a Touch Tone phone call the line attached to the E-30. Step 3. When the E-30 answers, enter the 6-digit security code(factory set to 845464-see section C).A double beep should then be heard indicating you have entered the programming mode. 2. Without the Security Code Step 1. Move DIP switch 2 to the ON position (sets unit to answer incoming calls-see section H). Step 2. Move DIP switch 3 to OFF (incoming calls enter the programming mode without security code-see section H). Step 3. From a Touch Tone phone call the line attached to the E-30. Step 4. When the E-30 answers, a double beep will be heard and you will automatically enter the programming mode. Step 5. 1 When finished programming, move DIP switch 3 back to the ON position (see section H). Warning: Failure to do step 5 above will cause the E-30 to call Viking Technical Support instead of your programmed number. Note: If a valid memory position is entered, a double beep will be heard, four beeps indicate an error. B. Quick Programming Features Enter Digits -then- Enter Memory Location First speed dial number ...........................................................................................0-20 digits then #00 Second speed dial number ......................................................................................0-20 digits then #01 Third speed dial number ..........................................................................................0-20 digits then #02 Fourth speed dial number ........................................................................................0-20 digits then #03 Fifth speed dial number ...........................................................................................0-20 digits then #04 To add a*at any point in the dialing string...............................................................** To add a#at any point in the dialing string...............................................................*# To add a four second pause at any point in the dialing string....................................*7 Toggle between Touch Tone and Pulse dialing.........................................................*6 Miscellaneous options(factory set to 000210) .........................................................6 digits(0-9) then #17 Timing/Dialing options(factory set to 234111) .........................................................6 digits (0-9) then #18 Change security code(factory set to 845464) .........................................................6 digits(0-9) then #19 Exit programming and disconnect ...........................................................................#7 Reset all programming to factory default settings ....................................................### Features Overview Mounting Screws: (4) 6-32 x 3/4" Marine grade 316 stainless steel, flat head, 5/64" hexdrive,screws(included). O O Microphone: Omni-directional microphone Faceplate: 14 gauge Marine grade 316 O with protective water-resistant cloth. stainless steel faceplate and push button switch(sealed per IP67). Speaker: Mylar speaker with rubber gasket to maintain water-tight seal and eliminate water deterioration. 0 0 Speaker Screen: Stainless steel speaker screen with 0.018" diameter holes to prevent Call punctures from paperclips,etc. O Push Button Switch: Push to initiate call, OO push again to disconnect. Solid 316 stainless Condensation Drain Hole steel internally sealed per IP67. VIKING. LED: Lights red for"In-Use"indication. DIP Switches(see page 7): 1: Normal Audio Detection 2: Increased Audio Detection O O as 0 0[p0j30 Faceplate Gasket: 1/8"thick closed cell PVC p 0 ❑ to provide a water-tight seal. Microphone Volume 0 0 0 op 00(1 H go WE Speaker Volume 0 0 �G 00 ,o ® Earth Ground: To increase surge protection, ®�®o loosen the screw labeled (1) (as shown)and 0 o o� tl fasten a wire with ring terminal(included)from DIP Switches(see page 7): 0 nnnmm oo ggg��o� the mounting screw to Earth Ground(grounding 1: Push Button Feature(connect/disconnect) rod,water pipe,etc.) 2: Auto Answer Feature(on/off) O O 3: Programming Switch(normal/programming) Installation A. Mounting QIMPORTANT. Electronic devices are susceptible to lightning and power station electrical surges from both the AC outlet and the telephone line. It is recommended that a surge protector be installed to protect against such surges. Caution: When warm air comes in contact with cold surfaces, such as outside walls and conduits, it causes condensation. To prevent condensation from accumulating inside the E-30 always bring conduit into the bottom of the unit. If this is not possible, drill a 114"diam- eter hole in the bottom of the gray plastic box. *Note:Peel off paper liner and adhere gasket to the back of the faceplate, centering it over the four corner mounting holes. Be careful to position the modular jack inside the chassis as not to damage the components on the circuit board. (4)0.38"diameter•••--°°••-; 2.1" * (for gooseneck mounting) 1 Adhere gasket to front panel, Front View of 4.0 I E centering over mounting holes �~3.25" (4)0.2 x 0.43 slots•••••• Plastic Rough4n 5.22" �.I for double gang box Box(included) e (2)0.2 x 0.43 slots..... for single gang box E-30-EWP shown with Viking Model • o o 0 0 � ock Q 5.0" Gooseneck 2 o e o 0 0 5.14" Pedestal 0 p�r� (1).74"dia.........Q-3 C •••°Condensatio ° Drain Hole • r: o ;.Wire knock out 0 o :.Push to Call Button 2.25' Front View t i Optional Rear View lu ed)x5 +•••(2)Standard flat head dry wall c VE-5x5(not included) (not included) s� (sheet rock)screws(not included) ....Red Off-Hook LED Indicator •••Condensation Drain Hole Important: The E-30 will NOT mount ..............(4)632 x 3/4"stainless steel,flat The optional VE-5x5 Surface Mount Box is designed to a standard double gang box. head,hexdrive,screws(included) to be surface mounted to a single gang box,double gang box or VE-GNP gooseneck pedestal(right).For Note:The plastic rough-in box(part#259576)may be purchased separately more information on the VE-5x5 and VE-GNP see in advance. Go to www.vikingelectronics.com and click on"Spare Parts". DOD#424. IF YOU HAVE A PROBLEM WITH A VIKING PRODUCT,PLEASE CONTACT-VIKING TECHNICAL SUPPORT AT(715)386.8666 Our Technical Support Department is available for assistance Monday Sam-4pm and Tuesday through Friday Sam-5pm central time.So that we can give you better service,before you call please: 1. Know the model number,the serial number and what software version you have(see serial label). 2. Have your Technical Practice in front of you. 3. It is best if you are on site. ZETURNING PRODUCT FOR REPAIR RETURNING PRODUCT FOR EXCHANGE The following procedure is for equipment that needs repair: The following procedure is for equipment that has failed outi(within 10 days of Purchase): 1.Customer must contact Viking's Technical Support Department at 715-386-8666 to obtain a Return Authorization(RA) 1.Customer must contact Viking's Technical Support at 715386-8666 to determine possible causes for the problem.The number.The customer MUST have a complete description of the problem,with all pertinent information regarding the customer MUST be able to step through recommended tests for diagnosis. defect,such as options set,conditions,symptoms,methods to duplicate problem,frequency of failure,etc. 2. If the Technical Support Product Specialist determines that the equipment is defective based on the customer's input 2. Packing:Return equipment in original box or in proper packing so that damage will not occur while in transit.Static and troubleshooting,a Return Authorization IRA.)number will be issued.This number is valid for fourteen 1141 sensitive equipment such as a circuit board should be in an anti-static bag,sandwiched between foam and individual- calendar days from the date of issue. Iy boxed.Ali equipment should be wrapped to avoid packing material lodging in or slicking to the equipment.Include 3.After obtaining the R.A.number,return the approved equipment to your distributor referencing the R.A.number.Your ALL parts of the equipment.C.O.D.or freight collect shipments cannot be accepted.Ship cartons prepaid to: distributor will then replace the product over the counter at no charge.The distributor will then return the product to Viking Electronics,1531 Industrial Street,Hudson,WI 54016 Viking using the same R.A.number. 3.Return shipping address:Be sure to include your return shipping address inside the box.We cannot ship to a PO Box. 4.The distributor will NOT exchange this product without first obtaining the R.A.number from you.If you haven't 4. RA number on carton:In large printing,write the R.A.number on the outside of each carton being returned. followed the steps listed in 1,2 and 3,be aware that you will have to pay a restocking charge. LIMITED WARRANTY Viking warrants its products to be free from defects in the workmanship or materials,under normal use and service,for a period of one year from the date of purchase from any authorized Viking distributor or 18 months from the date manu- factured,which ever is greater.If at any time during the warranty period,the product is deemed defective or malfunctions,return the product to Viking Electronics,Inc.,1531 Industrial Street,Hudson,WI.,54016.Customer must contact Viking's Technical Support Department at 715-386-8666 to obtain a Return Authorization(R.A.)number. This warranty does not cover any damage to the product due to lightning,over voltage,under voltage,accident,misuse,abuse,negligence or any damage caused by use of the product by the purchaser or others.This warranty does not cover non-EWP products that have been exposed to wet or corrosive environments. NO OTHER WARRANTIES.VIKING MAKES NO WARRANTIES RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS OTHER THAN AS DESCRIBED ABOVE AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FIT- NESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. EXCLUSION OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.VIKING SHALL NOT,UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES,BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER,OR ANY OTHER PARTY,FOR CONSEQUENTIAL,INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAM- AGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE SALE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT SOLD HEREUNDER. EXCLUSIVE REMEDYAND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.WHETHER IN AN ACTION BASED ON CONTRACT,TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY)OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY,ANY LIABILITY OF VIKING SHALL BE LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT,OR AT VIKING'S OPTION,REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND ANY LIABILITY OF VIKING SHALL BE SO LIMITED. IT IS EXPRESSLY UNDERSTOOD AND AGREED THAT EACH AND EVERY PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT WHICH PROVIDES FOR DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES,EXCLUSION OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,AND EXCLU- SIVE REMEDY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY,ARE SEVERABLE FROM ANY OTHER PROVISION AND EACH PROVISION IS A SEPARABLE AND INDEPENDENT ELEMENT OF RISK ALLOCATION AND IS INTENDED TO BE ENFORCED AS SUCH. FCC REQUIREMENTS the necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA.Inside the front panel If trouble is experienced with the I for repair or warranty information,please contact: of this equipment is a label that contains,among other information,a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Viking Electronics,Inc.,1531 Industrial Street,Hodson,Wl 54016(715)386.8666 If requested,this number must be provided to the telephone company. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network,the telephone company may request that you disconnect the The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.Excessive REN's on a equipment until the problem is resolved. telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming cap.In most but not all areas,the sum of Connection to Party Line Service is subject to Slate Tariffs.Contact the state public utility commission,public service com- the REN's should not exceed five(5.0)To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line,as deter- mission or corporation commission for information. mined by the total REN's,contact the local telephone company.For products approved after Juy 23,2001,the REN for WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND(OR)MAKING TEST CALLS TO EMERGENCY NUMBERS: this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQB#TXXXX.The digits represented by##are the Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.Perform such activities in the off-peak REN without a decimal point(e.g.,03 is a REN of 0.3).For earlier products,the REN is separately shown on the label. hours,such as early morning or late evenings. , The plug used to conned this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrester in the AC outlet to which this device is connected.This FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA.If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected is to avoid damaging the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges. to the telephone line,ensure the installation of this E-30 does not disable your alarm equipment.If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. PART 15 LIMITATIONS If the E-30 causes harm to the telephone network,the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary dis- This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class Adigital device,pursuant to Part 15 of the continuance of service may be required.But if advance notice isn't practical,the telephone company will notify the cus- FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment tomer as soon as possible.Also,you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is rise- is operated in a commercial environment.This equipment generates,uses,and can radiate radio frequency energy and, essary. t not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,may cause harmful interference to radio communica- The telephone company may make changes in its facilities,equipment,operations,or procedures that could affect the twins.Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will operation of the equipment.If this happens,the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make be required to correct the interference at his own expense. lifilli d E-30/E-30-EWP Handsfree Speaker Practice Phone with Dialer TELECOM SOLUTIONS FOR THE 21ST CENTURY August 20,2012 Provide Reliable and Intelligent Handsfree Communication! The E-30 handsfree phone is designed to provide quick and reliable handsfree communication and can be connected directly to a C.O. line or analog PABX/KSU station. �3 The E-30 features non-volatile memory, a built in dialer, and intelli- ° gent call progress detection for automatic hang-up when the call is completed. Call. Illllll�l �,• r The E-30 can be programmed to dial up to 5 different numbers on ring no � " E-301E-30-EWP answer or busy and can be configured gar Brushed 316 Stainless Steel to dial these numbers until answered. The model E-30-EWP adds Enhanced Weather Protection (EWP) for outdoor installations where the unit is exposed to precipitation or condensation. EWP products feature foam rubber gaskets and boots, sealed connections, gel-filled butt connectors, as well as urethane or thermal plastic potted circuit boards with internally sealed, field-adjustable trim pots and DIP switches for easy on- E-30 shown with site programming. For more information, see DOD# 859. optional VE-5x5 Features applications Non-ADA Hot-Line Phones for: • Vandal Resistant Features: 14 gauge louvered 316 stainless • Elevators • Stadiums steel faceplate with permanent laser etched graphics, speaker/ • Parking lots/ramps • Convention centers mic screen, heavy duty metal"Call' button and hex drive • ATM machines mounting screws Gate and Door Entry Phones for: • Weather Resistant Features: Marine grade 316 stainless • Business lobbies Residences steel faceplate,screws and push button switch. Switch • Pedestrian gates internally sealed per IP67. Mylar speaker. Self-draining mic mount. Faceplate, mic and speaker gaskets. Weather resistant CAUTION-'When installing on an analog extension of a phone system: powder paint on optional VE-5x5(DOD#424). Some phone systems do not conform to analog telecom standards and might not be compatible with the E-30 speaker phones.For a detailed description of • Telephone line powered the telephone line specifications required for any of the E-30 phones, see • Non-volatile E2 memory(no batteries required) DOD#869. 21n louder background noise environments, the push to talk ver- • Programmable to dial up to 5 numbers on busy sion may be required(E-30-PT or E-30-PT-EWP). or ring no answer • Red off-hook LED indicator Specifications • Volume adjustments for microphone and speaker • Advanced call progress detection:disconnects on busy Power: Telephone line powered. Minimum 24V DC talk battery voltage, signal, return to dial tone, CPC, reorder tone, maximum call with a minimum loop current of 20mA loop.Loop current may be boosted time out and programmable silence time out on low current lines with a Viking Model TBB-1B talk battery booster(see • Selectable auto-answer feature for monitoring DOD#632). • Extended temperature range (-15°F to 130°F) Minimum Ring Voltage: 25VAC RIMS • Flush mountable using included plastic rough-in box REN M 0.5A • Optional VE-5x5 surface mount back box(DOD#424) Dimensions: Overall-127mm x 127mm x 57mm(5"x 5"x 2.25"), * • E-30-EWP is designed to meet IP66 Ingress Protection Rating Plastic Electrical Box-102mm x 102mm x 54mm (4"x 4"x 2.12") (see DOD#859 for more information) Shipping Weight: 1 Kg (2.2 Ibs) Operating Temperature:-26°C to 54°C (-15°F to 130°F) Phone... 715.386.8861 Humidity-E-30: 5%to 95% non-condensing Humidity-E-30-EWP: Up to 100%condensing www.vikingeleetronies.eom Connections: Gel-filled butt connectors 1 Proven,Reliable Offers extremely consistent read range. Unaffected by body Typical Maximum*Read Range Technology shielding or variable environmental conditions,even when close ProxPoine Plus reader-up to 3"(7.5 cm) to keys and coins. MiniProx®reader-up to 5.5"(14 cm) ThinLine®II reader-up to 5.5"(14 cm) Convenient To Use Can fit into a wallet or purse. Use with a strap and clip as a ProxPro®reader-up to 8"(20 cm) photo ID badge. ProxPro®II reader-up to 9"(22.9 cm) Prox8O--up to 5.5"(14 cm) Cross-reference A cross-reference list correlating the external card number MaxiProx®reader-up to 24"(60 cm) and the programmed ID number is provided for easy system Dependent on local installation conditions. administration. Dimensions Security Offers over 137 billion unique codes. 2.135"x 3.385"x 0.075"MAX. (5.4 x 8.6 x 0.19 cm) Long Life Passive,no-battery design allows for an infinite number of reads. Operating Temperature Durability Strong,flexible and resistant to cracking and breaking. -50°to 160°F(-45°to 70°C) Companion 1321 Photo pouch overlay Weight Products: 1324 PVC Direct print overlay 0.24 oz.(6.8 gm) Warranty Lifetime warranty against defects in materials and Part Number workmanship(see complete sales policy for details). Base Part No.:1326 Description RF-programmable,125 kHz,HID artwork,customer-specified ID numbers,vertical slot punch. 0.075" Options 2.135" (0.19 cm) .External card numbering(inkjet only;no laser engraving) (5.4 cm)— MAX. •Custom artwork(text or graphics) MAX. (Please see"How to Order Guide"for a description of the O options and associated part numbers.) M CONPOFAMN 3.385" (8.6 cm) ProxCard°II ProxCard II Artwork(front) All dimensions are nominal @2007 HID Global.All rights reserved.HID,and the HID logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HID Global in the U.S.and/or other countries.All other trademarks,service marks,and product or service names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.Rev.412007 For best results,pleaze MKT-PROXCARDii_DS_EN print on recycled paper. ACCESS experience. hidcorp.com HID Global Offices: Corporate Asia Pacific Latin America Europe,Middle East&Africa North America 19/F 625 King's Road Circunvalacion 1 9292 Jeronimo Road North Point Despacho 2 Haverhill.Suffolk Island East CoLjardines del :s• Irvine,CA U-SA. Hong Kong Leon 1 Gm England :11 3160-9800 / 41 1 .li 3160-4809 1 41 714:41 Faxi (949) 1 Fa>c +52 477 779 1493 An ASSA ABLOY Group brand 1 tie. ' ABLOY Pr°crxCs `l I ACCESS Application The RF-programmable ProxCard® II proximity access card is the industry choice for a cost-effective solution to proximity access control. Features 1 Offers universal compatibility with all HID proximity readers. 1 Provides durable packaging and consistent read range. 1 Provides an external number for easy identification and control. 1 Supports formats up to 85 bits,with over 137 billion codes. 1 Custom pre-printed artwork available. 1 A PVC overlay allows for on-site photo ID using most direct image printers. 1 Using HID's ProxProgrammer®,card vendors can ship ProxCard II proximity cards,custom programmed to their customers' requirements,from their own inventory. Enables smaller order quantities and overnight delivery. (Check with vendor for availablilty.) An ASSA ABLOY Group brand ASSA ABLOY 1 I i • h � Mounting Unobtrusive design mounts directly onto metal including door Typical Maximum*Read Range mullions. ProxCard°II card-up to 5.5"(14 cm) ISOProx®II card-up to 5"(12.7 cm) Hazardous Designed to mount onto a junction box included with each DuoProx1 II card—up to 5"(12.7 cm) Location MiniProx® reader.The junction box is attached to an appropriate surface Smart ISOProx®/DuoProx®cards—up to 5"(12.7 cm) Reader Mounting location utilizing four holes. Proximity&MIFARE('card-up to 5"(12.7 cm) ProxCard5 Plus card-up to 2"(5.1 cm) Audiovisual When a proximity card is presented to the reader,the red LED ProxKey°II keyfob-up to 2"(5.1 cm) Indication flashes green and the beeper sounds.The multicolor LED and MicroProxO Tag-up to 2.5"(6.4 cm) beeper can also be controlled individually by the host system. *Depending on local installation conditions. Diagnostics On reader power-up,an internal self-test routine checks and ver- Dimensions: Kies the setup configuration,determines the internal or external 6.0"x 1.7"x I.0" control of the LED and beeper,and initializes reader operation. (15.2 x 4.3 x 2.54 cm) An additional external loop-back test allows for the reader outputs and inputs to be verified without the use of additional Material:Polycarbonate UL 94 test equipment. Power supply: Indoor/outdoor Sealed in a rugged,weatherized polycarbonate enclosure Standard MiniProx:5-16 VDC Design designed to withstand harsh environments,providing reliable Haz.Loc.MiniProx:5-16 VDC performance and a high degree of vandal resistance. Linear power supplies are recommended. Easily Interfaced Wiegand output model interfaces with all existing Current requirements: Wiegand protocol access control systems.Clock-and-Data(mag- Max Average 30 mA netic stripe)model interfaces with most systems that Typ Peak:75 mA accept magnetic stripe readers. Operating temperature: Security Recognizes card formats up to 85 bits,with over 137 billion -22°to 150'F(-30°to 65°C) unique codes. Operating humidity: Warranty Lifetime warranty against defects in materials and 0-95%relative humidity non-condensing workmanship(see complete sales policy for details). Weight: With terminal strip:3.5 oz.(99 g) Part Numbers Base Part No.:5365 Wiegand interface With pigtail:3.8 oz.(108 g) Base Part No.:5368 Clock-and-Data interface Haz.Loc.MiniProx: 3.8 oz(108 g) Description:Tri-State LED,Internal beeper on Options: Transmit frequency: 125 kHz • CLASSIC series cover in white,beige,charcoal gray,or black Excite frequency: 125 kHz (or) • Designer series cover in white,wave blue,charcoal gray,or Cable distance: black Wiegand interface:500 feet(150 m) LED and beeper operation Clock-and-Data interface:50 feet(15 m) • custom label Recommended cable is ALPHA 1295(22 AW(,)5 conductor *Hazardous Location MiniProx®only available with terminal minimum stranded with overall shield or equivalent. Additional strip. conductors may be required for LED or beeper control. (Please see"How to Order Guide"for a description of the Environmental:IP55 options and associated part numbers.) Certifications: UL294/cUL(US),FCC Certification(US),IC(Canada),CE(EU), C-tick(Australia,New Zealand), SRRC(China),MIC(Korea),NCC(Taiwan),MIC(Japan),iDA (Singapore),RoHS Hazardous Location MiniProx Hazardous Part Only:Canada/UL 1604 Listed(with Haz.Loc. shown with incorporated junction box only):Hazardous Locations Class I,Div.2,Groups junction box rated for use in A,B,C,D. hazardous locations. @2009 HID Global.All rights reserved.HID.and the HID logo are v remarks or registered trademarks of HID Global in the U.S.and/or other countries.All other trademarks,service marks,and product or service names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.Rev.05/2009 - MKT-MINIPROX-DS-EN ACCESS experience. hidglobal.com • Global Offices: Corporate Asia Pacific Latin America Europe,Middle East&Africa North America 19/F 625 King's Road Circunvalacibn• #201 B Haverhill Bus ness Park 15370 Barranca P1,vvy North Point Despacho 2 Phoenix Road Irvine,CA 92618 Islind East: Col.jai-dines del Moral Haverhill 37160,Gro Suffolk :1 800 Mexico CB9 7AE A00 Fax: +SS2 3160-480 0 Fax: 1 /714 850 1 840 An ASSAABLOYGroup brand ASSAABLOY ACCESS Application The MiniProx® proximity card reader's potted electronics enhance the security of the reader. The slim, attractive design is ideal for indoor or outdoor mounting. Features Accepts 5 to 16 volts, meeting most voltage requirements. / Available with Wiegand or Clock-and-Data interface. 1 Allows easy upgrade from magstripe to a proximity reader; no rewiring or pulling of new cable required. 1 Offers high reliability, consistent read-range and low power consumption in an easy-to-install package. 1 Mounts directly onto metal with no change in read range performance. 1 Provides multicolor LED, compatibility with all standard access control systems and internal or host control of LED and beeper. / Includes multilingual installation manual. An ASSA ABLov croup brand ASSA ABLAY Features CR=30 Recognition Method Proximity 125 KHZ tag reader Credential Technology HID Proximity,MIFARE, Smartcard, Magnetic stripe, Card Reader Available AVI or key-pads optional. Credential Support Three of the above types, maximum Customer Display Standard: OLED ['r 1 Intercom Options Analog,digital or VOIP intercom Data-line Surge Protection Standard Hotel or Value Card Optional E] Lot Full Sign Optional Operation Processor Embedded industrial controller Communication& Network RS-485 industrial communication or TCP/IP network communication Clock Build in, backed up by lithium ion battery a< E Off-Line Operation Full off-line mode enabled "^ sc Monitoring Transaction and all events monitored on TMS software in real time Housing—Rugged Aluminum Measurements 9.4" (24 cm) width; 10.6" (27 cm) depth; 42.7" (108.6 cm) height Weight 25 lbs. (11.3 kg) Color (Housing) Standard: White RAL 9010 [17cm1 Optional: Custom colors available 10.6" n5cm1 Electrical Voltage 100-240V AC 50-60 HZ 00.6 V - Current 1 A, 2A with heater FOOTPRINT Power Consumption l 00W, 20OW with heater [6km1 Operating Voltage 24V DC Environmental Conditions (10 2 m1 Operating Temperature —40 to 1220 F(-200 to 50°C) with heater s' IP Rating 54 Regulatory I. Safety • UL 60950-1:2007 CAN/CSA-022.2 No. 60950-1-07 EMC/FCC • FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B .a> • CE EMC PARKING SYSTEMS I.B.A. A e mbsr of Afton Industries Group Subject to design and functionality changes until product shipping. T.I.B.A •5126 South Royal Atlanta Drive •Tucker,Georgia 30084 • U.S.A. •770.491.7586 Phone•770.934.3384 Fax•www.tibaparking.com B T .k' ,,� s�.. .,'tai�:n,�,e �k. �✓�Sk MIMIIMM�1►' • � '` F j When a ticket issuing or processing device is NOT required, the CR-30 is the entry/exit device used in individual or multiple lanes designated for employees, monthly contract users, faculty and staff. The unit supports all technologies including: proximity, magnetic stripe, barcode, RF, RFID, AVI, keypad, smart card and license plate recognition. The CR-30 has a display to inform user of any problems with their account or post any special messages. The unit will operate in an off-line mode utilizing an onboard processor and memory. Standard: • Supports (2) Wigand and (1) serial device • OLED display • Aluminum housing • Pedestal '- Available in white • Communications line surge protector Optional: • Intercom: Analog, Digital or VOIP • Magnetic card reader for hotel guests, value cards and credit card users • 1 D or QR Barcode scanner • Custom graphic panel • Heater 0 0 PARKING SYSTEMS Iola.A. AF A�LUMberr of/A�h�o/n�M�d/uf�t�rl�N Grout' A A V'�,GEORGIA U.SJL 5126 South Royal Atlanta Drive Tucker,Georgia 30084 U.S.A. 770.491.7586 Phone 770.934.3384 Fax www.tibaparking.com wirs INTEGRATED TECHNICAL SYSTEMS, INC. Table of Submittals 1. TIBA — Smart Park Software 2. TIBA - MP-30 Entry Station 3. TIBA - SW-30 Exit Station 4. TIBA - APS-30 Pay-on-Foot Station 5. TIBA — CR-30M Card Reader Pedestal/Controller/Display 6. HID - Proximity Reader and Access Cards 7. Viking — Auto Dialer 8. Signal-Tech — Directional Control Signs 9. Signal-Tech — Lot Full Sign 10 . Magnetic — MHTM Barrier Gate /TS INTEGRATED TECHNICAL SYSTEMS, INC. Table of Submittals 1. TIBA — Smart Park Software 2. TIBA - MP-30 Entry Station 3. TIBA - SW-30 Exit Station 4. TIBA - APS-30 Pay-on-Foot Station S. TIBA — CR-30M Card Reader Pedestal/Controller/Display 6. HID - Proximity Reader and Access Cards 7. Viking — Auto Dialer 8. Signal-Tech — Directional Control Signs 9. Signal-Tech — Lot Full Sign 00*- 10 . Magnetic — MHTM Barrier Gate APS-30 - AUTOMATIC PAY STATION APS-30 AUTOMATIC-PAY-STATION SPECIFICATIONS 700.0 Features 27.55' Ticket reader Motorized barcode scanner. PLEASE PAY HERE Coin Acceptor Standard. Accepts all US coins. •a Coin Hopper Standard. ® D 4 hoppers with up to 800 coins capacity. 0 0 ® Extra coin storage Standard.For overflow control. ® o Q Credit Card reader Standard. • Receipt printer Standard. Bill acceptor Standard. Bills are read all four directions. Bill dispenser Standard. 2 denomination bill dispensing. ® Optional-3 denomination bill dispensing. Display Standard. 4 X 20 backlit LCD display. Intercom Substation Standard. Digital or TCP/IP intercom are optional. Surge protection Standard. Built-In Data-line surge protector Monthlies/Employees account payments. Optional. Accounts can be paid at APS-30. 450.0 17.71". � Operation Processor Embedded industrial controller Communication&network RS-485 industrial communication or 20 31" TCP/IP network communication. Clock Build in,backed up by li-on battery. Keeps clock a data up to 10 years. Off-Line operation Full off-line operation capability. Monitoring Transaction and all events monitored on Coin TMS software in real time. Housing—Stainless steal Measurements 516 mm/20.31" (L);700 mm/27.55" (W); 1680.5 mm/66.14" (H) Weight 120 KG /265 Lb Color Housing Blue- RAL 5012 or Silver-RAL 9007 or i White-RAL 9010 Locks Secured electronic and mechanical locking 454.0 — 1727 © mechanism. ID Electrical Power consumption 650 W Power supply 100-240 VAC/50-60 HZ Operating voltage 5,12,24 VDC 280."0- Environment conditions 11 A3 Operating Temperature -20 to 50 deg.C with standard heater - 71 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 M.' Appendix C —datasheets The APS-30 Pay-On-Foot station is a compact PLEASE PAY HERE L'1� design that allows for easy installation in confined areas like elevator lobbies. Our simple user-friendly interface allows patrons to breeze through the payment process. The APS-30 is �u built your way, with or without coins, custom colors,custom graphics and many other options. The APS-30 accepts coins, bills, credit/debit cards and dispenses coins and bills for change. Vouchers and stickers can be used to validate tickets. A consolidated report is automatically printed via the printer when the APS-30 is accessed by management or maintenance personnel. TIBA's high value products offer owners a swift ROI on parking automation projects. • Credit card acceptance. • Coin acceptance and dispensing utilizing recycling technology. • Cash acceptance. • Cash dispensing up to three notes. • Receipt printer • Stainless steel housing. • Journal printer function. • Multi-language interface. • Dual level security via access card and mechanical lock. • Locking cash vaults. • Built-In intercom. • Data line surge protection and heater. • VOIP Intercom substation. • Custom graphic panels. • Monthly account payments. • Chaser ticket acceptance. • Data line surge protection and heater. •ta► -70- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Appendix B-Measurements f�9 • UUM Qoo � ■ t o - �H s 0 t a L, 0 t aoo n N W { I �.z9'£Z C? - o °1 Ln' CD .i mN_ £s zr - 69- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Trouble shooting The banknote reader communicates information and host machine status via the green an red LEDs on its bezel. Various bezel LED codes indicate the state of the unit and denote when an equipment malfunction has occurred. For more details see Appendix A—Troubleshooting charts Additional troubleshooting charts see Appendix A Periodic cleaning Under normal use the banknote reader should be cleaned every 6 month Required items: - Soft lint- free cloth - Isopropyl alcohol(90 % solution) Step 1 Clean the Bezel area first Step 2 Separate the lower from the upper guide assembly see 4 2 Step 3 Using the required items clean the following areas: ,mow, - Currency channel surfaces and guides - Main optics window area - Rollers/wheels on lower guide assembly - Drive axles and O rings on upper guide assembly - Front optical sensors - Rear sensor prism - Side looking sensors Step 4 Slide Lower—guide assembly into Upper guide—assembly Step 5 Connect Interface connector harness cable Step 6 Apply power AOW - 68- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 TI.B.A. Separating the lower from the upper guide assembly Step 1 Disconnect power supply and disconnect interface connector(RS—232)Harness cable Step 2 u 2 1 Figure 10:Banknote reader-Separating lower from upper guide Depress simultaneously the spring loaded latch 1,upwards and the locking lever 2 and pull the lower guide assembly - 67- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 i4t 1 t3. 2 Figure 9:Emptying the Stacker Press the spring loaded latches 2 from both sides and pull it outwards Step 4 Use the key to open the case AOW - 66- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 -The Hookup cables r: 3. Access the currency channel as follows: Depress spring-loaded Lever Latch at rear of validator head and then pull Lower-Guide Assembly out of Upper-Guide Assembly. 4. Using a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with 90-percent isopropyl alcohol,clean the following areas (Figures 1,2,3,or 4): a) Currency channel surfaces: remove any surface dirt on upper and lower guides. b) Optics windows: clean optics window surfaces on upper and lower guides. c)Drive and Pressure Rollers: clean rollers on the upper and lower guides. d) Side-looking Sensors: clean sensor surfaces. e)Bar Code Reader/Mag head: carefully remove deposits from surface areas; DO NOT scratch surface areas. f)Front and Rear Optical Sensors: clean all surfaces. g) Using oil-free compressed air only, dry all surfaces to remove residue. - 65 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Ti*: Pressure Rollers (d,total) idler Wheels t2,teal) Main Optics Window Front Optical Sensors - the lower guide assembly Lower-Guide Assembly— Beltless *ak - The Stacker Pusher Drive R System Pusher Plate (hidden beneath Pressure Pressure Plate) P Pressure Plate Slide Pressure Guide Plate Guide AW - 64- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 T.Ita- CAUTIONS: • DO NOT scratch the surfaces of the optics window while cleaning these components, as this can impair the performance of the Currency Validator. • DO NOT allow liquid to contact the drive belts or enter the unit, as this can damage components. • DO NOT use unapproved cleaners, as this can cause permanent surface damage;use only cleaners as directed in this procedure. • DO NOT use cotton swabs to clean the unit, as this can leave unwanted material on the surfaces. The Currency validator head is composed of: -the upper guide assembly Front Optical .. Sensors Side-Looking Site-Looking Sensor Sensor Drive Rollers w (6,Total) Main Optics wridow Rear Senses Prism Upper-Guide Assembly - 63 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Tpo Procedure To clean and inspect the Currency Validator,follow these steps: WARNING: AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT. DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE SERVICING THE UNIT. 1. Power down Currency Validator and disconnect Host machine's interface cable from Currency Validator's main connector(e.g., MDB or RS-232 Serial Connector. 2. Remove Currency Validator from its mounting frame. Step 1 Disconnect power supply and disconnect Interface connector(RS—232)Harness cable Step 2 Separating the lower from the upper guide assembly l------- Qwii 2 1 Figure S:Banknote reader-Separating lower from upper guide Depress simultaneously the spring loaded latch 1, upwards and the locking lever 2 and pull the lower guide assembly - 62- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 GPT Maintenance PERIODIC CLEANING Depending on its environment and usage, the Currency Validator may require periodic cleaning to restore it to optimum performance. Under normal use,the Currency Validator should be checked every 6 to 12 months. For unusual operating conditions, such as when the unit is exposed to dirt, dust, water spray, airborne oil and/or sand, more frequent cleaning will be required. To remove dirty deposits and smudges from the bezel and other surfaces of the Currency Validator,use a soft, lint-free cloth, dampened with a 90-percent solution of isopropyl alcohol only. CAUTION: DO NOT flood the bezel area with liquids, as this can damage the electronics within the unit. A.Cleaning Currency Channel With constant use, a buildup of dirt, which is transferred from the surface of the bills, will accumulate on the pressure rollers, drive rollers, and optics. Periodically, these parts should be cleaned to ensure reliable operation. B. Required Items The items required to clean the Currency Validator are: Soft, lint-free cloth Isopropyl alcohol (90-percent solution) Oil-free, compressed air. - 61 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 T:i#A. Stacker troubleshooting chart Symptoms Possible Causes Corrective Action(s) 1. Stacker Stacker's entry slot is blocked . Check Stacker's entry slot for possible damage Malfunctions. by the Pusher Plate. and/or blockage. Also, check slide guide for damage Foreign object is jamming the • Remove foreign objects from drive gears. drive gears. • Stacker may be full. • Remove cash from Stacker. 2. Bills jam in Dirty bill guides or foreign . Clean bill guides;remove foreign objects(refer to Stacker. object(s)in the Cash Box. • Stacker may be full. . Empty cash from Stacker_ 3. Currency • Pusher Plate Sensor is . Replace Stacker. Validator reports damaged and it does not allow a Stacker jam, Pusher Plate to return to the but bill is not top-most pos ition. jammed in Stacker. .0", - 60- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 T . .A� AOMK Symptoms Possible Causes Corrective Action(s) 1. Currency . External power is not applied . Verify that power and ground are connected to the Validator is not to the Currency Validator. appropriate pins on the main connector. working;bezel LEDs are not lit. . Damaged MDB or RS-232 . Check for bent, missing or damaged pins in the interface connector and/or appropriate connector. pins. 2. Bills jam in the . Drive Rollers and/or Pressure . Clean the exposed Drive Rollers and pressure channel. Rollers are dirty,damaged,or Rollers loose. Foreign objects appear in . Remove foreign objects from channel, ensure channel. channel is free of debris- . Upper-Guide and Lower-Guide . Ensure that Lower-Guide Assembly is securely Assemblies are not properly latched to Upper-Guide Assembly. engaged. . Rear Sensor Prism is loose, . Reattach Rear Sensor Prism to Upper-Guide misaligned,or has fallen off_ Channel 3. At power up, . Obstruction is blocking the . Clean front sensors Currency front sensors. Validator cycles and red LED is lit. 4. Currency Side-Looking Sensors(SLS) Clean SLS lens Validator are blocked:lens is dirty, disabled after scratched,or damaged. power up;green bezel LED is not lit. Upper-Guide and Lower-Guide . Ensure that Lower-Guide Assembly is securely Assemblies are not properly latched to Upper-Guide Assembly. engaged. 5. No commun- MDB or RS-232 interface- * Ensure RS-232 or MDB interface connectors are ications with host connectors are notproperiy securely attached to harness of host machine. machine. attached to host machine. . Reload program software- . Power is not getting to switching regulators. . Corrupted EEProm. - 59- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 MA'.A.' APPEDIX Appendix A -GPT Banknote reader Troubleshooting Bezel led codes Bezel LED Codes Description of Code Green LED is continuously k2 AURORA is in the Idle State and ready to accept currency. and red LED is off. Green LED is off and red LED is VLA Mode is enabled;Aurora is waiting for insertion of VIA Card. flashing. Green LID is off and red LED is Inhibit State is enabled. continuously lit. Green and red LEDs are flash- Error condition exists. To determine the appropriate Error Code,taint the ing sequentially. number of times the red LED flashes between flashes of the green LED. De- scriptions and remedies for the error codes are defined below: Error Codes Description and Remedy 1 Front Sensors are blocked. Remove object from the Front Sensor area. 2 All rotes are disabled. Check that host has enabled at least one denomination. 3 Rear Sensor is blocked. Remove object from the Rear Sensor area. 4 Channel is jammed. Remove the note or object from the channel. . 5 Channel is open. Fully insert the Lower-Guide Assembly into the Upper-Guide Assembly; ensure the spnr. loaded Lever Latch is engaged. 6 Unit does not detect a Stacker when a Stacker is required for sys- tem operation. Install a Stacker. 7 A full Stacker is detected. Empty the Stacker. 8 Stacker failed to start or the time allowed to complete the cycle was exceeded. Replace tte Stacker. 9 Unit is disabled by a command from the host Host must send a command to enable the unit. 16 Unit has not received messages from the host before the protocol (i.e.,MOB or V2.2)specific timeout period has elapsed. Check host and associated cabling. 11 Error occurred while trying to send credit to tte host. Host did not acknowledge credit message. Check cabling. 12 Error occurred in the Protocol Adapter Assembly. Replace Adapter. 13 Slow Rear Flag—credit will not be issued. Remove object bbckinq the Rear Flag Sensor. 14 Unit's internal temperature exceeds operating range. Ensure host machine's cooling fans are operating. 15 Video adjustment failure. Unit did not successfully complete VLA (e.g.,incorrect paper medium and/or failed optics). 16 System error,a fault is detected in the software controlling the unit. Check program;run CRC and,if necessary,reload program. 17 Unit hardware error. Download the applicable MDB or V2.2 pro- gram(if not loaded)and use the diagnostics command to display the particular fault. 18-20 Not used. General Troubleshooting Chart - 58- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 - Disconnect the printer from the electricity supply and have it repaired by a specialized technician when: • The feed connector has been damaged • The printer has been exposed to rain or water • The printer does not function normally despite the fact that all instructions have been followed WARNING Do not touch the print head area and the motor surface, because they become very hot during and just after printing. ATTENTION Faites attention a ne pas toucher la tete de l'imprimante parce que elle se rechauffe en travaillant WARNING Make sure that no foreign objects are on the thermal paper and the platen. ATTENTION Assurez vous qu'il n'y aucun objet sur le rouleau du papier thermique WARNING Never pull out the paper in any direction with the print head loaded. ATTENTION Ne pas tirer le papier thermique etant inserer dans l'imprimante WARNING Never touch the cutter of the autocutter ATTENTION Ne pas toucher au decoupeur - 57- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 6.4 Receipt printer maintenance 6.4.1 Cleaning the printer - The printer cleaning is done only when the printer has the surrounding temperature and it is not hot after printing session. Open the printer head until it stops. Raise the printer head from the platen by rotating the Lever, head-up. - Wipe the heat elements of the print head or the platen lightly with a cotton swab soaked in alcohol solvent(ethanol, methanol, or IPA). Using other solvents may damage the print head. - After the alcohol evaporates completely,return the print head to its original position by loadingthe Lever, head-up. 6.4.2 General maintenance instructions Before cleaning the printer disconnect power supply Make sure the printer is placed in such a way as to avoid damage to its wiring. Use the electrical power supply indicated on the printer label. Avoid dust from printer surrounding cleaning as prescribed in general maintenance instruction - Do not introduce foreign objects into the printer as this could cause a short circuit or damage parts that could jeopardize printer functioning. - Do not spill liquids onto the printer - Do not carry technical operations on the printer with the exception of the scheduled maintenance procedures and troubleshooting operations written in this manual Use only printing paper complying with technical specification of the printer Store thermal paper away from heat and light. - 56- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Hopper 6.3 Coin Hooper maintenance WARNING Hazardous voltage. Only personnel trained by A.Dealer should carry out maintenance operation ATTENTION Tension dangereuse 5eulement le personnel qualifie peut entretenir ce materiwl WARNING Cut off power supply unless the specified operation requires differently ATTENTION Coupez Valimentation avant de commencer tout operation a moins que les directives soot differentey WARNING Make sure that cleaning material are neither swallowed nor in contact with the eyes ATTENTION Assurez vous que les liquides que vous utilisez pour nettoyer, Warrive pas au yeux ou a la bouche WARNING There are sensitive electronic components inside the device, dust and moisture have negative effect. Clean only with recommended material ATTENTION Les composants electroniques sont sensibles a Vattaque chimique. Nettoyez avec les liquides recommandes par le fabricant - 55- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 6.2 Preventive maintenance The preventing maintenance includes the following operations once a month: Materials: paper roll replacement, dry Air spray,cleaning card, Banknote validator cleaning card 3 v 1. Sensor level inspection—If above 40 call local dealer for Motorized advice. Barcode— 2. Barcode window cleaning. reader 3. Ticket path cleaning.Use dry air spray. Bank note I. Check proper bank note dispensing in a cash transaction. Dispenser Bank note I. Check acceptance of bank note in a cash transaction reader 2. Clean bank note reader with cleaning card. Change collectors 1. Check Hooper levels. 2. Coin empty test-empty 10 coins from each Hooper. Aow Credit card reader 1. Clean with cleaning card. Panel buttons 1. Check push buttons+lamination. 1. Receipt printer inspection—check barcode quality+Cutter, from reports option in the management mode. Receipt printer 2. Clean path of paper through printer from dust or pieces of paper.Use dry air spray. 3. Insure printer lever closed and in place. 4. Replace paper roll if needed. Inner cleaning I. Empty inner housing from any papers,roll cores or other staff that doesn't belong to the equipment. Communication Test I. Check communication from management software. - 54— APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 M.-' Chapter 6 — Maintenance Due to the fact that the pay-in-lane terminal is designed for heavy duty performance there is no need for abundant maintenance operations 6. 1 Preliminary instructions - Some of the maintenance operations demand special training and will be performed only by authorized technicians ( see definition of authorized technicians in page 3 —Definitions and abbreviations) - When cut off power supply is required switch off the circuit breaker - Do not carry maintenance operations during peak hours if possible - Highly recommended: have spare parts ready in case of emergency needs. - Cleaning operation will be done with proper cleaning material and dry air pressure WARNING Hazardous voltage. Only personnel trained by A.Dealer should carry out maintenance operation ATTENTION Tension dangereuse Seulement le personnel qualifie peut entretenir ce materiwl WARNING Cut off power supply unless the specified operation requires differently i ATTENTION i Coupez l'alimentation avant de commencer tout operation a moins que les directives sont differentes WARNING Make sure that cleaning material are neither swallowed nor in contact with the eyes ATTENTION Assurez vous que les liquifies que vows utilisez pour nettoyer, n'arrive pas au yeux ou a la bouche WARNING There are sensitive electronic components inside the device, dust and moisture have negative effect. Clean only with recommended material ATTENTION Les composants electroniques sont sensibles a l'attaque chimique. Nettoyez avec les liquides recommandes par le fabricant - 53- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 T1:g.�. WARNING Do not touch the print head area and the motor surface, because they become very A hot during and just after printing. ATTENTION Faites attention a ne pas toucher la tete de l'intprimante parce que elle se rechauffe en travaillant WARNING Make sure that no foreign objects are on the thermal paper and the platen. ATTENTION Assurez vous qu'il n y aucun objet sur le rouleau du papier thermique WARNING Never pull out the paper in an direction with the print head loaded. ATTENTION Ne pas tirer le papier thermique etant inserer dans l'imprimante WARNING Never touch the cutter of the autocutter ATTENTION Ne pas toucher au decoupeur Technical specification Normal Printing speed : 80 mm/s Power supply 24 V do Environmental condition: Operating temperature : 0—50 deg C Relative Humidity 10%- 80 % AAW - 52- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Tii ,.A. 7.5.1 Changing the paper roll CAUTION Z Do not disconnect power supply while performing the change of the paper roll Put the paper roll on the support axles so it unrolls as shown in the fig bellow Cut the edge straight with scissors. JP — 9 - Release the metal locking lever.. - Open the Thermal-head until it stops. Lift the green lever and remove the rest of the old paper roll. - Close the green lever back. - Close the Thermal-head until it stops. Lock the Thermal-head with the Metal lever. - Insert the thermal paper straight into the paper access and let printer to auto feed the paper. the leading edge of the paper reaches the paper exit. - To ensure correct paper feeding, load the paper as mentioned above. Otherwise, oblique paper feeding or paper jams may occur. 7.5.2 Handling paper lams - Open the Thermal-head until it stops. Remove paper from paper access. - Raise the Lever, head-up to lift the print head from the platen. Pull the paper out straight in the proper paper feeding direction. - 51 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 f 7.5 Receipt Printer The printer is composed of: - A metal frame (housing) - A printing mechanism - The cutter and ejector - Paper feeder Its function is to print a receipt and new entry ticket in case of a lost ticket. Receipt printer and Paper Feeder support - 50— APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Ti.A.A.I 6.4.6 Updatinp,Bills quantity 1. Add Bills by selecting:- Money Management--> `0' 2. Toggle with `#' and select: Add Bills --> `0' 3. Toggle with `#' and select the desired Cassette to update bill quantity: e.g. Casstte 1 -)- `0' } 4. Enter the TOTAL amount of bills. The existing amount of bills+ the amount of billss that have been added. Press#to confirm. Press "D "to return to the former screen. -49- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 6.4.5 How to handle the cassette Make sure to hold the handle on top of a cash cassette when carrying. Good example 41 All Bari example -48 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 (17)Do not use the bills folded at middle portion. Band seal Band seal (18)Do not use the waving bills. Band seal Band seal (19)Caution for new bills Once arrange the bills as shown below,and then introduce them into the cash cassette. Paste is used for new bills packing. Without removing paste,bills pick failure will occur. (20)Mounting conditions of deformed bill. A maximum of 10 identically deformed bills can be mounted at once. To mount more than 10 bills at once will cause pitch failure or jamming. O -47- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 A.Bill distortion should not exceed 5 mm. B.Bill distortion should not exceed 5 mm. (14)Do not use the bills with stapling needle. Siaplimg needle AM* (15)Do not use the bills greatly curved.(bills tied by band seal,etc.) Band seal (16)Do not use the bills with end folding. Folding Folding -46- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 '4 Tt.�";jo (11)Do not use the bills ragged and cannot be held straightly when one end is supported by a hand. 20 mm 35 mm When the end of the bill is held by 20 mm and the straight-ness of the bill is 35 mm or Less,it cannot be used. (12)Bill distortion. A. Bill distortion should not exceed 5 mm. B.Do not use. Z:O�., ::��z C.Bill distortion should not exceed 5 mm D.Bill distortion should not exceed 5 mm. E.Do not use. Bill distortion should not exceed 10 mm. (13)Do not use the bills with curl. -45- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 (7)Do not use the bills having serious winkles or broken section wherein paper fiber is broken and separation begin. Broken section Broken Wrinkle Wrinkle section (8)Do not use the bills having adequate life or sizing,but stained seriously. ,r Stain (9)Do not use the bills having serious worn out place.The bill thickness should not be less than 0.08mm (10)Do not use the bills with holes.(Perforated bills) Hole -44- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Tc! .A, (4)Do not use bills repaired with tape. 3 Tape x (5)When loading a bill bunch into a cassette,make sure that the bottommost bill gets no twist or fold. �yI i x (6)Please smooth the bended or crushed bills out. r --r x X x O -43- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 M.4-A- 6.4.4 Bill loading manual Before loading bills,follow the instructions below for proper operation. (1) Fan the stack of bills before loading. Align bills before loading them. +. Don't allow any bill protruding from the bunch. (2) Load bills in staggered units of 100 sheets so that the stack of bills does not bulge. Bulge 100 bills •—•_=' 100 bills 100 bills 100 bills x 0 (3) Straighten any folded corners of bills as much as possible before loading. x Q A^ok -42- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 e = T" a 7"T-7-P (4)Before loading bills into the cassette,jog and align them. i E, i (5)Load the bills into the cassette so that they fit between the side guides. (6)Lower down the pressure plate and rear guide to hold the loaded bills. e (7)Close the lid (8)Insert the cassette into the dispenser and push it all as far as it goes. Notes 1.Do not load more than 500 bills into one cassette.(Reference value,New bills which thickness is 0.12mm) 2.Do not cram the bill. -41 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Button (2) Lift the lid up in the direction of arrow b to completely open the cassette. b (3) Pull the pressure plate toward you and raise it along the grooves on both sides.When the pressure plate reaches the top of the groove,push the pressure plate forward so that it can be settled in the slots leading out of the grooves. -40- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Ti: : . 6.4.2 Inserting and removing a cash cassette -Removing a cassette (1)Press and hold the push-button at the bottom right corner of a cassette and remove the cassette from the dispenser. �r r•. Notes 1.All cash cassettes used in the bill dispenser are compatible with each other. 2.The bill dispenser cannot start operation when no cassette is installed. 1 f Caution 1 f Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the dispenser and cassette- 6.4.3 Loading Bills (1) Push and hold the green button on the front side of a cassette to release the lock and open the lid. - 39- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station-User Manual Rev. 2.00 AWN 6.4.1 Cash Cassette Handle Lid Front side Rear side Chassis Pressure plate Side guide Rear guide f .:. Lid: Top cover of the cash cassette Handle: Used for carrying the cash cassette Chassis: Main frame of the cash cassette Denomination magnet: Used to specify bill denomination for each cassette Magnet slot label: Identifies each of magnet slots where denomination magnets are inserted Pressure Plate: Used to hold a bill bunch loaded into the cash cassette Side guide: Used to align the long edges of the bills in the cash cassette Rear guide: Used to align the short edges of the bills in the cash cassette OKWW - 38 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 6.4 Bill Dispenser { o� i 2 denomination bill dispenser - 37- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Tui.A. A"k. 1 •a To install the cassette into the bill validator direct two bosses of the cassette to corresponding slots in the validator housing. Rotate the cassette in the direction of arrow till fasteners of the cassette hook the latches at the validator housing. AOW - 36- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 6.3 Bill Acceptor 6.3.1 Remove and install the bill cassette ° ll� ® d °0 a 6° d .0 s To collect bills from the cassette unlock security locks and open the cover.Remove bills.Close the cover_ 0 a � o °a ,t I no lock variant positions of plastic handle oPet, i unlocked poste locked position - 35 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 liif�i�• 5.3.3 Adding Coins The station has 4 hoppers: USA Standard configuration Hooper A: Stores coins of $ 0.05 USD(Nickel). Hooper B : Stores coins of $ 0.25 USD (Quarters). Hooper C : Stores coins of $ 1.00 USD (Dollar). Hopper D Hopper C Hooper D : Stores coins of $ 1.00 USD(Dollar). USA Standard confieuration Hooper A: Stores coins of $ 0.05 $CAD(Nickel). Hooper B : Stores coins of $ 0.25 CAD (Quarters). Hooper C : Stores coins of $ 1.00 CAD (Luni). Hooper D : Stores coins of $ 2.00 CAD (Tuni). Hopper A Hopper B 1. Add coins by selecting:- Money Management 4 `0' 2. Toggle with `#' and select: Aak Add Coins 4 `0' 3. Toggle with `#' and select the desired Hopper to update coin quantity: e.g. Hooper A —> `0' 4. Enter the TOTAL amount of coins. The existing amount of coins+ the amount of coins that have been added. Press#to confirm. Press " D "to return to the former screen. - 34— APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Ti BB A 5.3.2 Empty and reset the coin storage Open the lock and pull the safe storage outside. Collect the coins. 1. Empty the coins type selecting Money Management 4 `0' 2. Toggle with `#' and select: Empty Coins 4 `0' M �ViiIVi1� p�WYa�i�IUW'� ,r 3. Toggle with`#' and select `cash box'. " e.g. Cash Box 4 `0' 4. Press `0' to Reset Cash Box Count Press " D "to return to the former screen. - 33- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 T IA''.A. 5.3 Empty and add coins 5.3.1 Empty the coin hoppers The station has 4 hoppers: USA Standard configuration Hooper A: Stores coins of $ 0.05 USD(Nickel). Hooper B : Stores coins of $0.25 USD (Quarters). Hopper D Hopper C Hooper C : Stores coins of $ 1.00 USD (Dollar). Hooper D : Stores coins of $ 1.00 USD (Dollar). USA Standard configuration Hooper A: Stores coins of $ 0.05 $CAD (Nickel). Hooper B : Stores coins of $ 0.25 CAD(Quarters). Hooper C : Stores coins of $ 1.00 CAD (Luni). Hopper A Hopper B Hooper D : Stores coins of $ 2.00 CAD(Tuni). 1. Empty the coins type selecting Money Management —> `0' 'l 2. Toggle with `#' and select: Empty Coins --) `0' 3. Toggle with `#' and select the desired Hopper to empty. e.g. Hooper A 4 `0' 4. Toggle with `#' and select the desired amount of coins to empty. e.g. 100 coins --) # Press "D "to return to the former screen. Awk - 32— APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 T!,* A- Chapter 5 - Management mode 5.1 Opening the POF Open door procedure Enter the Manager card in the card reader. If card is approved, the electric locking solenoid will operate and disarm the locking system for 10 seconds. This will allow unlocking the POF machine with the key. A "Door open" report will be printed Closing door procedure Close the door by the key. Once the door is locked, the printer will produce a"Door close" report. 5.2 Login Management Mode To enter into management mode,press `D' on the keypad and: Press 99 4 # - 31 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 MW i.g . 4.2 Control& monitor remotely At the management software a right click on the desired device will open the relevant options for that device. Status screen A left double click on the desired device will open the status screen for that device. �7 Device status:#212- .O Printer:In order Form:Active --- _. 4�O Bill validator.In order Door controller Bill dispenser:In order Open door sensor Hoper AY:In order 1!0 Closed door sensor Hoper A2:In order (_4 Door sensor AM Hoper A3:In order 1�)Door sensor 42 Hoper#4:No data 19 Door sensor#3 Swallow unit Coupon unit Sensor value 1A: 0 Sensor value 19 0 Sensor value 2tk 0 Sensor value 2A: 0 Hoper coins#1:0 Hoper coins tit:0 Hoper coins A3:0 Hoper coins#4:0 Date ____Time Descri ption Comm. —Communication to main parking system controller(RS485 Communication). Form—status of device—active/not active. Printer—Receipt printer indicator. Door controller—Cash unit Main controller indicator. Bill Validator—Bill acceptor indicator. Bill dispenser—Bill dispenser unit indictor. Cassette#1—Bills level indictor Cassette#2—Bills level indictor Swallow unit—Ticket reader indictor. Sensor#1 —Front ticket sensor value indictor. Sensor#2—Rear ticket sensor value indictor. *"w - 30— APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 4.1.7 The Money Change policy programming The system can be set to utilize the money change policy to avoid coinage overflow or frequent coin shortage. The operation should be done with a licensed technician It enables the following possibilities: a. Use of the default setting which means give the change with the following order -Dispense the Banknotes first as much as possible(If a bill dispenser is installed) -Dispense the amount of largest coin value(as much as possible) and then the smallest coins value available b. Dispense a predefined amount of coins first, and then use the default setting(a) Additional possibilities enable to set the lower limit that will trigger filling required pop-up message 4.1.8 Cash Back— Lack of change Overpayment with insufficient change If the coin processing unit does not contain sufficient coins for change dispensing, there are the following possibilities: a. Patrons are made aware by a proper announcement on the user interface display and no change will be dispensed b. Patrons will receive a special credit voucher to present to the cashier and receive the respective change or use it as a future payment. c. The APS will stop functioning until the change amount will be introduced in the processing unit Ate'' - 29- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 T. .0 .-- 4.1.3 Pay with credit card Credit cards are accepted as valid payment method according to the agreements of the parking operator with credit card companies. The Client can pay part of the total fee by a credit card and the rest by cash. It is mandatory to insert the cash first and then the credit card. Local Restrictions regarding payment with credit cards are applied also in this procedure. 4.1.4 Payment with vouchers or stickers There is an option to pay part of the parking fee with vouchers or discount stickers. Voucher: Insert the ticket in the ticket slot and the voucher in the voucher slot. The charge that is still due will be displayed and the discount will be displayed as well. Stickers: The stickers are placed on the ticket. The ticket shall then be inserted in the ticket slot. The charge that is still due will be displayed and the discount as well. 4.1.5 Receipt The parking operator should decide whether to issue automatically a receipt or upon request. There is an option to still issue a receipt up to a determined time even that the parking payment has already completed. 4.1.6 Lost Tickets A lost ticket can be issued to clients claiming lost ticket. There are two options to handle the lost ticket: -Charge for a lost ticket The definition how much to charge for a lost ticket is done in Management software (SmarWark.) Force the client to call a manned station by intercom which will activate the lost ticket procedure or apply some other solution. - 28- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Chapter 4 - Functionally & Operation The basic payment process is the following: - Insert parking entry ticket in the ticket reader - Pay the parking fee using one or more of the payment methods:- Coins/Banknotes Credit card Discount stickers Discount vouchers - Retrieving the bar coded ticket, the change and the receipt 4.1 Transients The parking fee is calculated based on parking time and the tariff. When the transient parking ticket is insert into the ticket reader, the parking will be calculated and shown on the LCD display. The payment methods are the following (or a combination): 1. Coins 2. Banknotes 3. Credit card 4. Vouchers and stickers 4.1.1 Pay with coins All local coins are accepted by the APS 30 and up to four coin types are dispensed as change. When a customer inserts a coin in the slot,the coin will be checked. If the coin is approved, it will be deducted from the total payment and immediately. If the client overpaid the coin processing unit will return it to the change pocket. If the client pressed the Cancel button while the payment process,the payment process will stop and a receipt of the partial payment is issued. The rest can be paid in any other terminal. If the payment was not completed, the final charge will be calculated according to the full parking time when the payment is completed. The amount that has been pain will be deducted from the total fee. In any case the patron must complete the payment in order to leave the garage. 4.1.2 Pay with Bills All existing local banknotes are accepted. If needed, some banknote types can be blocked by order. - 27- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 3.5 Electrical network The electric network includes the following components: - Power supply modules with 0 5 VDC power supply unit 0 12 VDC power supply unit 0 24 VDC power supply unit - Terminal blocks F o Connectors o Service socket o Automatic circuit breaker i z e�4 - 26- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Testin Led communication Signal Under each connecter there with two operating modes: - Continuously lit: communication ok - Flashing lit : Communication error Reset method Restarting power supply using the circuit breaker The reset causes the following effects: - Zeroes the controller's parameters - Ejects tickets stucked in the readers - Resets banknote reader -25- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 T.tt�.�►. Connections The door controller is connected to the following device: D type 9 connections 1 —Main controller 2— Banknote reader 3 —Free for diagnostic usage 4—Access ticket reader 5—Vouchers reader 6—Receipt printer 7—Coin processing unit 8—(D-type 25 pin)Credit card reader Power connections 9 -Power supply 10-Panel illumination payloads Flat serial connector to the coin processing controller Configuration module The controller ID is established through the deep switches setting. The deep switches settings enable identification by the main controller. Led indicator lights Under each connector there are two led indicators with the following operating modes - Continuously lit : communication ok - Flashing lit : Communication error Operation The main controller controls the following devices through their local controllers: - LCD display and Receive keyboard commands - Change dispensing mechanism(banknotes and coins) - Electric locking mechanism The main controller communicates with: - The cash register controller - The door controller The door controller module The controller ID is configured through the dip switches setting. Each controller has a unique setting. It enables the identification by cash register controller. - 24— APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 T A 3.4 Machine controllers The controllers provides logic control, monitoring functions and communication with the parking main controller and therefore includes the following parts: - Inputs activated by the logic - Outputs to switch currents through terminal pairs - Led indicator lights to provide operational status - Configuration module The APS-30 Automatic pay station includes the following controllers: 3.4.1 Main controller The controller provides logic control, monitoring functions and communication with the cash register and therefore includes the following parts: - Inputs activated by the logic - Outputs to switch currents through terminal pairs - Led indicator lights to provide operational status - Configuration module 3.4.2 Door controller Functional description The controller provides logic control, monitoring functions and communication with the cash register and therefore includes the following parts: - Inputs activated by the logic - Outputs to switch currents through terminal pairs - Led indicator lights to provide operational status - Configuration module Design and operation Figure 7:Door controller "` -23— APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 3.3 Voucher/Ticket reader 3.3.1 Validating unit Description The reader has the following components 1 -Bar code reader 3—LED indicators 2-Optical sensor 5 -Motors activating buttons 3—Motors The activating buttons (4) enable to activate the motors (3) (swallow or eject directions) The led indicators testify that a paper is detected by the IR sensors. 1 2 sh 3 Reader Side view 4 Awk - 22- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Ti." 3.3 Bill dispenser Bill Dispenser The bill dispenser returns up to 3 different types of banknote change. +` E 1 O t M i; _ 21 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 n 3.2 Bill Acceptor 3.2.1 General The banknote reader performs the following operations: - Checks the validity of the banknote inserted - Relays the corresponding signal to the door controller - Security Storage 3.2.2 Description ta a it e s e (tC 11'1 I � Cassette R Bill validator Figure 6:Banknote reader - 20— APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 3.1.3 Coin Hoppers Hopper D Hopper C Hopper A Hopper B Hoppers 3.1.4 Coin safe storage 5 „E Figure 5: Coin Safe Storage - 19— APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 3.1.2 Five way coin sorter The 5 way coin sorter is installed under the coin validator and conveys the coins to the corresponding tracks: - The respective hoppers - Safe storage unit - Back to the tray if the coin is not valid It can be programmed to convey the coins to the safe storage unit when certain conditions are met (for more details contact local dealer). The non valid coins are directly conveyed to the non valid coins chute. - 18- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Chapter 3 - APS Sub-components 3.1 Coin processing unit 3.1.1 Coin Validator— General description The coin processing unit includes the following components: - Coin validator - 5 way coin sorter - Hoppers - Coin safe storage ry�i v. 41( j s r Figure 4: Coin validator The coin validator is based on analyzing physical and chemical coin parameters such as diameter, , thickness, weight, alloy content, lead content etc ... The coin validator is a reliable heavy duty device and need no maintenance procedure at operator level. - 17- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 2.2 Components inside the housing r 3 LJ II 4 : i 2 Figure 3:Components inside the housing 1 Hoppers +inlets 2 Receipt printer 3 Bill Dispenser 4 Coin overflow safe 5 Main breakers Awk - 16- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Ti. . ►. 2.2 LCD display and operating push button. The display and the push buttons are the human machine interface with the APS 20. It works like the banks ATM machines prompting instruction near the respective button. It also enables performing the following tasks: - Choosing the pay method - Choosing the language interface - Maintenance operations. - Lost ticket printing option 2.4 Intercom The intercom system enables to communicate with the operator . The system includes the following parts: 1- Speaker 2-Microphone 3-Call button 2.5 Locking system The locking system comprises two main sub system: - Mul-T-Lock mechanism - Electric solenoid mechanism for tribe lock - 15 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 2.1 Coin processing unit The coin processing unit includes the flowing parts - Coin insertion slot - Coin validator, - Coin separator - Hoppers - Coin safe storage unit 2.3 Banknote reader The banknote reader is enabled to accept a payment using a banknote.Banknote insertion is enabled once an unpaid ticket has been inserted in the ticket reader. After feeding the bills, the bills are validated, evaluated and stored in the storage unit cassette. 2.6 Credit card reader The credit card reader enables Payment of the parking fee using a valid credit card. An unpaid ticket has to be inserted in the ticket reader first 2.8 Ticket reader The ticket reader is a bar code reader that reads the dispenser's ticket information . When a ticket is introduced , the display shows the amount to pay. 2.7 Voucher/Coupon (Chaser Ticket) reader and collector The Coupon(Chaser ticket)reader is a bar code motorized reader that allows partial or full payment of the parking fee using a voucher coupon. The voucher is collected and stored 2.9 Dispensing tray(coins) Rear view The change and the receipt are dispensed into the dispensing tray. Non valid Coins will be also returned to this tray. - 14— APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Front panel components PLEASE PAY HERE 111 J 1 y 3 5 ❑s �o 0 4 6 Figure 2:Front Panel 1 Coin insertion slot 2 Banknote reader bezel 3 Intercom 4 Coin Change and receipt tray 5 User interface LCD display 6 Operating push buttons 7 Ticket reader bezel 8 Credit card reader Insertion slot 9 Lock 10 Banknotes dispenser - 13 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Ti.� . Ar 2.1 Main components The main components of the unit are shown in the picture below PLEASE 12AY HERE rl-:-)' 2 �119s, Figure 1:APS 30 main components 1 Front panel 2 User interface devices 3 Change trays - 12- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Chapter 2 - DESCRIPTION The APS 30 Automatic Pay Station is an unmanned, pay on foot station that provides automated Payment services to parking patrons.The device shall read encoded tickets and vouchers with payment information. The patron then uses the prepaid ticket at the exit terminal in order to exit It has the following interoperability features: - User interface display with operating buttons. - Coin acceptance slot and change tray - Banknote acceptance and change tray - Receipt out feed - Intercom system to communicate with an operator - 11 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 M4 . :�_. , CAUTION Battery precautions : Caution : To eliminate the risk of battery explosion , the battery should not be replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions ATTENTION Precaution batterie Remplacez une batterie avec une autre du meme type pour eviter les risques d'explosion. Debarrassez les batteries usees selon les instructions en cours 1.5 Safety on site CAUTION Verify that the unit is always locked to avoid endangering third parties ATTENTION Verifiez la cloture du systeme pour eviter des degdts aux passants CAUTION The shell of the parking should be completed before intalling the APS-30 terminal. Dirt,dust and building implements can endanger the sensitive electronic parts and other mechanism included in the system " ATTENTION Le bdtiment devrait etre f ni avant l'installation du systeme L'ambiance poussiereuse peut endommager les composants electronique du systeme aussi que d'autre mecanismes. - 10- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 °l:14. CAUTION Public network connection: The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce risk,there are restrictions on the diameter of wires in telecom cables, between the equipment and the mating connectors.To reduce the risk of fire , use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords ATTENTION C&blage pour reseau de telecommunication : Les cables appartenant au reseau de telecommunication du batiment peuvent presenter un risque dans le cas que les cables,exposes, sont en contact avec les lignes de tension AC Pour reduire les risques it y a des restrictions en ce qui concerne le diametre des cables de telecommunication. Utilisez les cables Num 26 AWG ou plus larges pour diminuer les risques d'inflammation CAUTION Voltage adjustment: Before connecting the product to the power line,make sure the voltage of the power source matches the requirements of the product, as marked on the label located near the power connectors ATTENTION Reglage de tension: Veuillez que la tension de la source d'alimentation soit conforme a la tension de consommation du materiel(Affiche sur l'etiquette pres des connecteurs de tension) CAUTION Before working on equipment connected to the power line or telecommunication lines,remove jewelry or any other metallic object that may f come into contact with energized parts { ATTENTION Otez les objets metalliques que vows portez avant d'approcher du materiel sous tension ate'` - 9— APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 CAUTION High voltage:Disconnect the product from the power line before removing the cover. Any adjustment and maintenance of the opened device should be done only while the device is disconnected from its power source and should only be performed by qualified personnel ATTENTION Haute tension :Coupez Valimentation du systeme avant d'6ter le couver Tout operation de reglage ou maintenance sera faite quand le systeme est debranche Ces operations seront faites par des personnes qualifiees CAUTION Grounding: Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last. Do not connect telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment. Make sure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting the ground. Grounding is provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a Ai protective earth terminal. The earth lug should be connected to the protective earth at all times,by a wire with a diameter of 16 AWG or wider. ATTENTION Brancher a terre : Il est obligatoire de brancher a terre en premiere et la couver a la fin Veuillez a ne pas connecter des cables de telecommunication a du materielle qui n'est pas brancher a terre.La bonne installation recommande est de brancher a terre la prise principals d'alimentation. La cable de connexion aura au moins le diametee 16 AWG. CAUTION Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes i ATTENTION Veuillez que Vinstallation electrique soft conforme a la reglementation existante dans votre pays CAUTION A readily accessible device who's On and OFF positions are clearly marked and is suitably rated and approved , is installed in the equipment ATTENTION Un interrupteur,facilement reconnu et utilisable ayant la mesure appropriee et approuve, est installe sur le materiel CAUTION Suitable for mounting on concrete or other non- consumable surface only ATTENTION Il est recommande d'installer le systeme sur des fondations de beton ou pared (materiel non inflammable) - 8- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 T.14 1 4 Power Supply safety instructions Alimentation,Electricite CAUTION Check visually and daily the power supply line and the electrical safety devices(fuse protection,grounding). All the installation should be in according to valid national standard and regulations ATTENTION Wrifiez une foi par jour les bonnes conditions des fils electriques, les fusibles et les interrupteurs d'urgence. Les installations electriques seront conformes d la reglementation existante dans votre pays CAUTION brands circuits for hard wired units must be suitable to the unit s*Iratin ATTENTION fils electriques auront l'epaisseur necessaire pour tenir l'intensite du rant CAUTION Installation should be carried out by a licensed technician. Installation ,assembly ,removal and adjustment of additional electric components also should be carried out by licensed technician ATTENTION L'installation du syWrne sera faite par un technicien autorisee T.LB.A. L'installation de nouveaux componants, les remplacements , les ajustements du materiel seront fais par un technicien autorise T.LB.A.. CAUTION Replacement of any electrical components must be done with new ones with identical rating ATTENTION Le remplacement d'une piece defectueuse sera faite par une piece ayant les memes parametres electriques. CAUTION It is necessary to read the related information about the electrical components to assure safe operation ATTENTION Il est obligatoire de lire l'information concertante une composante electrique avant de l'utiliser - 7- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 1.3 Operating,safety instructions CAUTION A!W The PARC system operator should be someone instructed by the authorized dealer ATTENTION L'utilisateur du systeme aura reCu une formation respective pour utiliser le systeme CAUTION The operator should conduct only the maintenance instructions given in chapter N and should be previously trained to do so . ATTENTION L'utilisateur mMera seulement les instructions de maintenance ecrite dans le chapitre N et sera instruit pour le faire. CAUTION The system should be used only for the designed purpose following the operation instructions in this manual.This unit is part of T.I.B.A.PARC system and should be used as such. ATTENTION " Le systeme sera utiliser seulement pour les propos enonces dans ce manuel et suivants les directives&rites dedans. La boite de commande acces automatique APS- 30 fait parti du TI B.A. Parc systeme et sera utilise seulement dans ce contexte CAUTION Maintenance operations should be conducted with authorized spare parts ATTENTION Dans le cas de remplacement, it faut utiliser seulement les pieces de rechanges autorisees ANW - 6- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Chapter 1 - SAFETY INFORMATION 1. 1 General safety information The APS 30 Automatic Pay On Foot Station is subjected to several quality control tests to enable long time usage nevertheless correct operation practice is needed. The operator should read and perfectly understand the instructions written in this manual. The manufacturer will withdraw warranty obligations in case of damages caused by ignorance of the related instructions. 1.2 Safety instructions pictogrammes Signaux et instructions de sicuriti Special instructions are given in a table with the related pictogram and have the following meaning: Les instructions ecrites dans les tables sont Wes aux signaux suivants Caution :The operator should follow exactly the instructions given in the table Attention : L'utilisateur doit suivre exactement les instructions dans la table Useful information Information utile i Hazardous voltage Tension dangereuse - 5- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 ABREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS PARC Parking Access &Revenue Control Systems Technician Authorized technicians are technicians trained by T.I.B.A. or by authorized Dealers/partners to perform maintenance operation written in this manual Dealer Authorized Dealer LPR License Plate Recognition system RF Reader The reader that checks if the proximity badge is valid AVI Automatic Vehicle Identification: Hands free access control. The RFID system has a reading range up to 10 meters - 4- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 6.3.1 Remove and install the bill cassette....................................................................................................................35 6.4 BILL DISPENSER..................................................................................................................................................37 64.1 Cash Cassette.........--....--...................................................................................................................38 6.4.2 Inserting and removing a cash cassette.................................................................................................39 6.4.3 Loading Bills..........................................................................................................................................39 6.4.4 Bill loading manual................................................................................................................................42 6.4.5 How to handle the cassette.....................................................................................................................48 6.4.6 Updating Bills quantity..........................................................................................................................49 7.5 RECEIPT PRINTER................................................................................................................................................50 7.5.1 Changing the paper roll..........................................................................................................................51 7.5.2 Handling poperjams..............................................................................................................................51 CHAPTER6—MAINTENANCE............................................................................................................................53 6.1 PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................................................................................53 6.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE...................................................................................................................................54 6.3 COIN HOOPER MAINTENANCE...............................................................................................................................55 6.4 RECEIPT PRINTER MAINTENANCE............................................................................................................................56 6.4.1 Cleaning the printer................................................................................................................................56 6.4.2 General maintenance instructions.........................................................................................................56 APPEDIX............................................................................................................................................................58 APPENDIX A—GPT BANKNOTE READER........................................................................................................................58 Troubleshooting........................................................... ..................................................................................58 GPTMaintenance............................................................................................................................................61 APPENDIXB—MEASUREMENTS..................................................................................................................................69 APPENDIXC—DATASHEETS...............................................................................--.....................................................70 - 3- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Table of contents TABLEOF CONTENTS...........................................................................................................................................2 ABREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS......................................................................................................................4 CHAPTER 1-SAFETY INFORMATION...................................................................................................................5 1.1 GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION...............................................................................................................................5 1.2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS PICTOGRAMMES.....................................................................................................................5 1.3 OPERATING SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............................................................................................................................6 1.4 POWER SUPPLY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS......................................................................................................................7 1.5 SAFETY ON SITE...................................................................................................................................................10 CHAPTER2-DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................................11 2.1 MAIN COMPONENTS............................................................................................................................................12 2.2 COMPONENTS INSIDE THE HOUSING....................................................................................... ................................16 CHAPTER 3- APS SUB-COMPONENTS...............................................................................................................17 3.1 COIN PROCESSING UNIT........................................................................................................................................17 3.1.1 Coin Validator—General description......................................................................................................17 3.1.2 Five way coin sorter................................................................................................................................18 3.1.3 Coin Hoppers..........................................................................................................................................19 3.1.4 Coin safe storage....................................................................................................................................19 3.2 BILL ACCEPTOR...................................................................................................................................................20 3.2.1 General...................................................................................................................................................20 3.2.2 Description.............................................................................................................................................2a 3.3 BILL DISPENSER...................................................................................................................................................21 3.3 VOUCHER/TICKET READER....................................................................................................................................22 3.3.1 Validating unit Description.....................................................................................................................22 3.4 MACHINE CONTROLLERS.......................................................................................................................................23 3.4.1 Main control ler.......................................................................................................................................23 3.4.2 Door controller.......................................................................................................................................23 3.5 ELECTRICAL NETWORK..........................................................................................................................................26 CHAPTER 4-FUNCTIONALLY&OPERATION......................................................................................................27 4.1 TRANSIENTS.......................................................................................................................................................27 4.1.1 Pay with coins.........................................................................................................................................27 4.1.2 Pay with Bills..........................................................................................................................................27 4.1.3 Pay with credit card................................................................................................................................28 4.1.4 Payment with vouchers or stickers.........................................................................................................28 4.1.5 Receipt....................................................................................................................................................28 4.1.6 Lost Tickets.............................................................................................................................................28 4.1.7 The Money Change policy programming...............................................................................................29 4.1.8 Cash Back—Lack of change....................................................................................................................29 4.2 CONTROL&MONITOR REMOTELY..........................................................................................................................30 CHAPTER 5-MANAGEMENT MODE..................................................................................................................31 5.1 OPENING THE POF..............................................................................................................................................31 5.2 LOGIN MANAGEMENT MODE................................................................................................................................31 5.3 EMPTY AND ADD COINS...................................................................................................................................32 5.3.1 Empty the coin hoppers..........................................................................................................................32 5.3.2 Empty and reset the coin storage..........................................................................................................33 5.3.3 Adding Coins...........................................................................................................................................34 6.3 BILL ACCEPTOR...................................................................................................................................................35 .4"k - 2- APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 n APS-30 Automatic Pay Station USER MANUAL low - 1 - APS-30 Automatic Pay Station—User Manual Rev. 2.00 Features APS=30 Ticket reader Motorized barcode scanner Coin Acceptor Standard Automatic Coin Hopper Standard; 4 hoppers with up to 800 coins capacity each PayStation Extra Coin Storage Standard; for overflow control Credit Card Reader Standard 27.5" Receipt Printer Standard 69.8cm Bill Acceptor Standard; bills are read in all four directions Bill Dispenser Standard—2 denomination bill dispensing; Optional—3 denomination bill dispensing • _E:1 8 Display Standard;TFT color display E ® Intercom Substation Standard; digital or VOIP intercom are optional c � ®® e Surge Protection Standard; built-In data-line surge protector P Month lies/Employees Optional;accounts can be paid at APS-30 N6 Im N 0 Account Payments E Operation ° U Processor Embedded industrial controller Communication &network RS-485 industrial communication or TCP/IP ethernet communication 20.3" Clock Built-in, backed up by lithium ion battery; 51.6cm Keeps clock and data for up to 10 years Off-Line Operation Full off-line operation capability Monitoring Transaction and all events monitored on TMS software in real time. Housing-Stainless Steel E Measurements 27.5" (69.8 cm)width; 20.3" (51.6 cm) depth); 66.2" (167.8 cm) height Weight 265 Lbs. (120 kg) 2.2cm Color(Housing) Blue—RAL 5012, or 61„ Silver—RAL 9007, or alcm White—RAL 9010 Locks Secured electronic and mechanical locking mechanism 27.4° 69.7cm Electrical 23.6' (23.6cml Power Consumption 650 W (1250 with heater) E E Power Supply 100-240 VAC/50-60 HZ u Operating Voltage 5,12,24 VDC mo 6° 8 (1.5cm) 20.3c m Environmental Conditions 10PLC 24.0" Operating Temperature —411 to 122°F (-200 to 50°C)with eater 61cm 64.8cm Regulatory FOOTPRINT Safety • UL 60950-1:2007 PARKING SYSTEMS n � CE • CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1-07 a ` EMC • FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B eta' BBAB a ! • CE „A M—b of Af o Industries Gee Subject to design and functionality changes until product shipping. T.I.B.A •5126 South Royal Atlanta Drive •Tucker,Georgia 30084• U.S.A. • 770.491.7586 Phone •770.934.3384 Fax•www.tibaparking.com P, z t The APS-30 Pay-On-Foot station is a compact design that allows for easy installation in confined areas like elevator lobbies. Our simple, user-friendly interface allows patrons to breeze through the payment process. The APS-30 is built your way; with or without coins, custom colors, custom graphics and many other options. The APS-30 accepts coins, bills, credit/debit cards and dispenses coins and bills for change. Vouchers and stickers can be used to validate tickets. A consolidated report is automatically printed via the printer when the APS-30 is accessed by management or maintenance personnel. TIBA's high value products offer owners a swift ROI on parking automation projects. Standard: • Credit card acceptance KEME • Coin acceptance and dispensing utilizing recycling technologyP"Y �^P, • Cash acceptance • Cash dispensing up to three notes • Receipt printer • Journal printer function o p o • Multi-language interface s • Dual level security via access card and mechanical lock 0 c U o 0 • Locking cash vaults ° ° • Built-In intercom • Data line surge protection and heater • Stainless steel construction Optional: • VOIP Intercom substation PARKING SYSTEMS '�B�A • Custom graphic panels � • Monthly account payments 'AM—brof Af—Mdu H[ ,G—p • Chaser ticket acceptance ATLANTA,GEORGIA U.S.A. 5126 South Royal Atlanta Drive Tucker,Georgia 30084 U.S.A. 770.491.7586 Phone 770.934.3384 Fax www.tibaparking.com 00M TL BA Appendix F - Advanced motorized reader settings Stages V'� 1 All DIP switches off DIP switch 7,8—on Insert ticket position :If ticket swallowed-OK If ticket ejected-Failed All DIP switches off DIP DIP DIP DIP Reset the � s position switch 7—on switch 5—on switch 7— switch 5— controller off off t All DIP switches off DIP switch 5—on All DIP switches off Reset the position position controller All DIP switches off Lift DIP switches in a All DIP switches off Reset the M M position sequence following the position controller order:8,7,6,5 And wait t All DIP switches off DIP Reset the controller position switch 8—on Level DIP switch I't--�MM _ FV Dip-switch 2 3 4 I 80 Off Off Off(default) 200 On Off Off _170 Off I On Off 120 On On Off 100 Off Off On 50 On Off On t 30 Off On On 20 On On On r". All DIP switches off DIP Reset the controller crz< position switch 6—on ' All DIP switches off DIP Reset the controller position switch 6—on -53 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 M we 0 M INPUT L WTPUT M PeleMUl ftO wnaLLC(DrY P—) :7 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (D • --------------------------------------------------------------------------- eY ......................................................- INNER HOUSING OUTPUT Clore GA,si OUTPUT wy Beam O t INPUT O Intercom SgnN R 00 0 0 0 IN lr �°° 0 0 Dl y0— 0 0 [Vol 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 4 3 2 T.I.B.A. ne 10 BS-MPSW- T- I y --------------------- -- - -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------- --------- ------------------ - - - ----------- GATE RS485,INTERCOM r-----IF ITLE:rPSW INTERCOM!' RS485 PEU: ---------- ID—i 1?/e6/NB?7 111.'-40 S.-9/1, • G•ptwvi h••»• 7.6 0,193 36 7.1 0,180 1 33 7.09 0,18 J - 1.8 6.8 0,173 - 37 6.3 0,160 34 1.6 6.0 0,152 - 38 5.91 0,15 - 1.5 5.6 0,142 35 5.51 0,14 - 1.4 5.2 0,132 39 - 5.12 0,13 - 1.3 5.0 0,126 36 4.8 IF 0,122 - 40 - 4.72 - - 1.2 0,12 4.5 0,114 37 - - 4.4 0,112 - 41 4.33 0,11 - - 1.1 4.0 0,102 38 42 - 3.94 ji 0,10 - - 1.0 3.6 0,0914 43 3.5 0,889 39 - 51 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 IN CmpBevl i�.uen .1.B.A. 70.9 1,80 18 64.1 1,63 14 - 64 1,63 16 63 1,60 16 57.1 1,45 15 56 1,42 17 - 55.1 1,40 - 14 50.8 1,29 16 - 48 1,22 - 18 - 47.2 1,20 - - 12 45.3 1,15 17 40.3 1,02 18 - 40 1,02 - 19 39.4 1,00 10 36 0,914 - 20 35.9 0,912 19 35.4 0,90 - 9.0 32.0 0,813 20 21 31.5 0,800 - 8.0 28.5 0,724 21 28 0,711 - 22 - 27.6 0,70 - - 7.0 25.3 0,643 22 - 24 0,610 - 23 23.6 0,60 - 6.0 a 22.6 0,574 23 22 0,559 24 20.1 0,511 24 - 20 0,508 - 25 19.7 0,50 5.0 18 0,457 26 - 17.9 0,455 25 17.7 0,45 4.5 16.4 0,417 27 15.9 0,404 26 15.7 0,40 4.0 14.8 0,376 1 28 14.2 0,361 27 13.8 0,35 - 3.5 13.6 0,345 - 29 12.6 0,320 28 12.4 0,315 - 30 - 11.8 0,30 3.0 11.6 0,295 - 31 - 11.3 0,287 29 - 10.8 0,274 - 32 10.0 0,254 30 33 9.84 0,25 - 2.5 9.2 0,234 - 34 - 8.9 0,226 31 - 8.4 0,213 - 35 8.0 0,203 32 7.87 0,20 - 2.0 Aw - 50 - Ticket Validator-Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 bi IN # M1Cc ESC xa ; 460.1 11,68 4/0 432 11,0 - 5/0 409.6 10,40 3/0 - 400 10,2 - 4/0 393.7 10,0 - 100 372 9,45 - 3/0 - 364.8 9,266 2/0 - 354 9,00 - - 90 348 8,84 2/0 - 324.9 8,252 1/0 - 324 8,23 1/0 315 8,00 - - 80 300 7,62 1 289.3 7,348 1 276 7,01 2 276 7,00 - 70 257.6 6,543 2 252 6,40 - 3 236 6,00 - 60 232 5,89 - 4 229.4 5,827 3 212 5,38 - 5 204.3 5,189 4 - 197 5,00 - 50 192 4,88 - 6 181.9 4,620 5 177.2 4,50 - - 45 176 4,47 - 7 162.0 4,115 6 160 4,06 - 8 157 4,00 - 40 144.3 3,665 1 7 144 3,66 - 9 138 3,50 - 35 128.5 3,264 8 128 3,25 10 118 3,00 30 116 2,95 11 114.4 2,906 9 104 2,64 - 12 101.9 2,588 10 - - 98.4 2,50 - 25 92 2,34 13 90.7 2,30 11 80.8 2,05 12 80.0 2,03 - 14 78.7 2,00 - - 20 72.0 1,83 13 15 -49 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 .1.B.A. Appendix D -Wiring conversion tables APPROX.O.D. CIRCULAR SQUARE WEIGHT WEIGHT D.C.RESISTACE D.C. AWG STRANDING MIL LBS•/ KG/KM OHMS/1000FT RESISTANCE INCHES MM AREA INCHES MM 1000 FT OHMS/KM 36 Solid 0.0050 0,127 25.0 0,013 0.076 0,113 445.0 146,0 36 7/44 0.006 0,152 28.0 0,014 0.085 0,126 371.0 1271,0 34 Solid 0.0063 0,160 39.7 0,020 0.120 0,179 280.0 918,0 34 7/42 0.0075 0,192 43.8 0,022 0.132 0,196 237.0 777,0 32 Solid 0.008 0,203 67.3 0.0001 0,032 O.t94 0,289 174.0 1 571,0 32 7/40 0.008 0,203 67.3 0.0001 0,034 0.203 0,302 164.0 538,0 32 19144 0.009 0,229 76.0 0.0001 0,039 0.230 0,342 136.0 448,0 30 Solid 0.010 0,254 100.0 0.0001 0,051 0.30 0,45 113.0 365,0 30 7/38 0.012 0,305 112.0 D.0001 0,057 0339 0,504 103.0 339,0 30 19142 0.012 0,305 118.8 0.0001 0,061 0.359 0,534 87.3 286,7 28 Solid 0.013 0,330 159.0 0.0001 0,080 0.48 0,72 70.8 232,0 28 7136 0.015 0,381 175.0 0.0001 0,072 0.529 0,787 64.9 213,0 28 19140 0.016 0,406 182.6 0.0001 0,093 0.553 0,823 56.7 186,0 27 7/35 0.018 0,457 219.5 0.0002 0,112 0.664 0,988 54.5 179,0 26 Solid 0.016 0,409 256.0 0.0002 0,128 0.770 1,14 43.6 143,0 26 10/36 0.021 0,533 250.0 0.0002 0,128 0.757 1,13 41.5 137,0 26 19/38 0.020 0,508 304.0 0.0002 0,155 0.920 1,37 34.4 113,0 26 7134 0.019 0,483 277.8 0.0002 0,142 0.841 1,25 37.3 122,0 24 Solid 0.020 0,511 404.0 0.0003 0,205 1.22 1,82 27.3 89.4 24 7132 0.024 0,610 448.0 0.0004 0,229 1.36 2,02 23.3 76,4 �ow 24 10/34 0.023 0,582 396.9 0.0003 0,202 1.20 1,79 26.1 85,6 24 19/36 0.024 0,610 475.0 0.0004 0,242 1.43 2,13 21.1 69,2 24 41/40 0.023 0,582 384.4 0.0003 0,196 1 1.16 1,73 25.6 1 84,0 22 Solid 0.025 0,643 640.0 0.0005 0,324 1.95 2,91 16.8 1 55,3 22 7130 0.030 0,762 700.0 0.0006 0,357 2.12 3,16 14.7 F 48,4 22 19/34 0.031 0,787 754.1 0.0006 0,385 2.28 3,39 13.7 45,1 22 26/36 0.030 0,762 650.0 0.0005 0,332 1.97 2,93 15.9 52,3 20 Solid 0.032 0,813 1020.0 0.0008 0,519 3.10 4,61 10.5 34,6 20 7/28 0.038 0,965 1111.0 0.0009 0,562 3.49 5,19 10.3 33,8 20 10/30 0.035 0,889 1000.0 0.0008 0,510 3.03 4,05 10.3 33,9 20 19/32 0.037 0,940 1216.0 0.0010 0,620 3.70 5,48 8.6 28,3 20 26/34 0.036 0,914 1031.9 0.0008 0,526 3.12 4,64 10.0 33,0 20 41/36 0.036 0,914 1025.0 0.0008 0,523 3.10 4,61 10.0 32,9 18 Solid 0.040 1,020 1620.0 0.0013 0,823 4.92 7,32 6.6 21,8 18 7/26 01048 1,219_jl 1769.6 0.0014 0,902 5.36 7,98 5.9 19,2 18 16/30 0.047 1,194 1600.0 0.0013 0,816 4.84 7,20 8.5 21,3 18 19/30 0.049 1,245 1900.0 0.0015 0,969 5.75 8,56 5.5 17,9 18 41/34 1 0.047 1 1,194 1627.3 0.0013 0,830 4.92 7,32 6. 1 20,9 18 65/36 0.047 1,194 1625.0 0.0013 0,829 4.91 7,31 6.4 21,0 16 Solid 0.051 1,290 2580.0 0.0020 1,310 7.81 11,60 4.2 13.7 16 7/24 0.060 1,524 2828.0 0.0022 1,442 8.56 12,74 3.7 12,0 16 65/34 0.059 1,499 2579.9 0.0020 1,316 7.81 11,62 4.0 13,2 16 26/30 0.059 1,499 2600.0 0.0021 1,326 7.87 11,71 4.0 13,1 16 19/29 0.058 1,473 2426.3 0.0019 1,327 7.35 10,94 4.3 14,0 16 105/36 0.059 1,499 2625.0 0.0021 1,339 7.95 11,83 4.6 13,1 ,6 14 Solid 0.064 1,630 4110.0 0.0032 2,080 12.40 18,50 2.6 8.6 14 7/22 0.073 1,854 4480.0 0.0035 2,285 13.56 20,18 2.3 7,6 14 19/27 0.073 1,854 3830.4 0.0030 1,954 11.59 17,25 2.7 8,9 14 41/30 1 0.073 1,854 4100.0 0.0032 2,091 12.40 18,45 2.5 8,3 t4 105/34 0.073 1,854 4167.5 0.0033 2,125 12.61 18,77 1 2.5 8,2 -48 - Ticket Validator-Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T.1.B.A. 11wvA l I�w)IT O O fro O -47 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 280 .0 140 .0 100 .0 C � C' C' C C, - C C C 0 S �0 200 .0 �10 .Ox45° ( x4) N C -46- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 �15Z4 I QD o I co 0 o 200.0 170.0 015 "0 I N, 0 o T° o T o N ° o o CD N to 140.0�, — - 280'0 -45 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 TLB.A. Ru�uq A M!,}�M�u f iN11�i 350.0 N CO -44- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 U-" Appendix C — Dimensions ,175 .9 0 0 00 0 0 00 N 0 N C) CD N 0 CD N C N 0 36 . 9 '1 .00 0 N ti Ln ook -43 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T•4w.eMw•)ITN)tT Appendix B — Installation Confirmation Form We recommend the installation subcontractor to fill and sign the following Form after accomplishing the installation Item Confirmation Remarks The foundations were built according to Yes❑ No ❑ manufacturer's instructions The terminal was assembled properly Yes❑ No ❑ and with no visible damages The voltage of the power source Yes❑ No ❑ matches the requirements of the product The communication functions normally Yes❑ No ❑ The Intercom is properly connected Yes❑ No ❑ The thermostat temperature is set to deg. C Installed by Name Date Signature Certification Number Supervised by Name Date Signature Certification Number 0 0%,, -42 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T1.B.A Appendix A— Address settings DIP switch setting: } Equipment � f System Software address—DIP Dec address address switch setting No. p 1 2 3 4 10 A 181 Off Off Off Off Off 0 B 182 on off off off off 1 ° C 183 Off on off off off 2 D 184 on on off- off Off 3 E 185 off off on off off 4 F 186 On off On off Off 5 187 Off On on off Off 6 's H 188 On On On Off Off 7 I 189 Off Off Off On Off 8 X J 190 on off off on off 9 K 191 off on off on off 10 •`'� "`... L 192 On On Off 0. Off 11 s M 193 off off On On off 12 N 194 On off On on off 13 O 195 off On on On On 14 _ On On On On Off 15 i P 196 off off off Off on 16 Q 197 On Off Off Off On 17 R 198 off On Off Off On 18 S 199 On On Off Off On 19 T 200 Off Off On Off On 20 L/ 201 On Off On Off On 21 »..z x..� - V 202 Off On On Off On 22 W 203 On On On Off On 23 X 204 off off Off on on 24 Y7 205 On Off Off On On 25 `s Z 206 Off On Off On On 26 x System address :The address identified by the cash register Software address : The address identified by Fastpark pro -41 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 G3 General Maintenance instructions - Before cleaning the printer disconnect power supply - Make sure the printer is placed in such a way as to avoid damage to its wiring. - Use the electrical power supply indicated on the printer label. - Avoid dust from printer surrounding cleaning as prescribed in general maintenance instruction - Do not introduce foreign objects into the printer as this could cause a short circuit or damage parts that could jeopardize printer functioning. - Do not spill liquids onto the printer - Do not carry technical operations on the printer with the exception of the scheduled maintenance procedures and troubleshooting operations written in this manual - Use only printing paper complying with technical specification written in appendix??? - Store thermal paper away from heat and light. - Disconnect the printer from the electricity supply and have it repaired by a specialized technician when: ■ The feed connector has been damaged ■ The printer has been exposed to rain or water ■ The printer does not function normally despite the fact that all instructions have been followed WARNING Do not touch the print head area and the motor surface, because they become very hot during and just after printing. ATTENTION Faites attention a ne pas toucher la tete de l'imprimante parce que elle se rechauffe en travaillant WARNING Make sure that no foreign objects are on the thermal paper and the platen. AATTENTION Assurez vous qu'il n y aucun objet sur le rouleau du papier thermique WARNING A Never pull out the paper in an direction with the print head loaded. ATTENTION Ne pas tirer le papier thermique etant inserer daps l'imprimante A WARNING Never touch the cutter of the autocutter ATTENTION N e pas toucher au decoy eur -40- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 Aft TI IKA. - Lift the green lever and remove the rest of the old paper roll. - Close the green lever back. - Close the Thermal-head until it stops. - Lock the Thermal-head with the Metal lever. - Insert the thermal paper straight into the paper entrance and let printer to auto feed the paper. The leading edge of the paper reaches the paper exit. - To ensure correct paper feeding, load the paper as mentioned above. Otherwise,oblique paper feeding or paper jams may occur. 3.3 Handling paper jams - Open the Thermal-head until it stops. - Remove paper from paper entrance. - Raise the Lever,head-up to lift the print head from the platen. - Pull the paper out straight in the proper paper feeding direction. -39 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 oow TI.B.A. G2 Changing the paper roll 3.1 Cleaning the printer - The printer cleaning is done only when the printer has the surrounding temperature and it is not hot after printing session. - Open the Thermal-head until it stops. - Raise the print head from the platen by rotating the Lever,head-up. - Wipe the heat elements of the print head or the platen lightly with a cotton swab soaked in alcohol solvent(ethanol,methanol,or IPA).Using other solvents may damage the print head. - After the alcohol evaporates completely, return the print head to its original position by loading the Lever,head-up. 3.2 Changing the paper roll CAUTION Z Do not disconnect power supply while performing the change of the paper roll - Put the paper roll on the support axles so it unrolls as shown in the fig bellow 0 Figure 16: Printer-Paper insertion - Cut the edge straight with scissors as shown in the fig. - Release the metal locking lever.. - Open the Thermal-head until it stops. - 38 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 OW TOLB.A. Rwvq♦Q�eW .II.NI LT G1 Printer description Front external view 1- Serial connector RS232 2- Power supply connector F2] 1 Figure 15: Printer External view Technical specification Normal Printing speed: 80 mm/s Power supply 24 V do Operating temperature: 0—50 deg C Relative Humidity : 10%-80% - 37 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 Oft U.B.A. Section H: Thermal receipt printer The thermal printer is a heavy duty reliable machine.It prints a receipt when paying by credit card on the ticket validator reader or in case the client did not receive a receipt from the Paying Station. i 2 3 Figure 14: Printer-Paper Feeder support The paper feeder feeds the receipt printer. The paper feeder has the following components: 1 -Paper roll 2 -Roll axle 3 - Support - 36- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 oak 1!•.pw�M -ITNILT 1 -Bar code reader 3—LED indicators 2 -Optical sensor 5 -Motors activating buttons 3 —Motors The activating buttons (4)enable to activate the motors(3)(swallow or eject directions) The led indicators testify that a paper is detected by the IR sensors. Maintenance The system is a reliable component therefore there is no need for any maintenance operation Perform a general inspection when opening the door and clean the insertion slot surrounding if needed Remove dirty deposits from the rollers and the optical sensors if needed -35 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 MuvA4..,, t IIN)li JO Ticket reader and collector 1 2 Ticket reader Side view OW 4 Isometric views Figure 13:Ticket reader and collector - 34- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 TLB.a Section G: Motorized barcode reader Om i - 33 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 F 2 Operational checks * Please send all parameters before the operational check 2.1 Ticket reader Insert a new ticket with grace time and watch the barrier raise. 2.2 Loop detectors and opening the barrier Simulate the exit operation with the condition of a car on the loop. 2.3 LCD Turn the tuning screw on the main controller until you get the best view on the LCD 2.4 Credential readers and communication test The test procedure of Magnetic card, Credit card and Proximity badge is as follows: • Insert and remove a magnetic card into the reader and watch a number=not on file. • Present a proximity badge near the RFID. You will receive response of information about the tag. 2.5 Heater and thermostat Adjust the thermostat temp to a level that will activate the heater(less than the surrounding temp) 2.6 Intercom Communicate through the intercom with the central station and check that the voice quality is OK 2.7 Receipt printer Turn off and on the exit terminal. When buttons will start to blink push the receipt button. 2.8 Memory check Turn off the exit terminal. Wait for one minute. Turn on the exit terminal. When the buttons will start to blink push the cancel button. If the name off parking lot will appear with the correct time,the memory is ok. If not please wait until the parameters will arrive to equipment. Try again after 15 minutes. -32 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T.i.B.a. ..,....,. .,.w, . Section F: Commissioning and final test F 1 Preliminary Inspection Disconnect power • Check that the components have no visible damage • Make sure the components are fitted correctly. Tighten any loose screw connection • Check that the plug and clamping connections are connected correctly • Check the ground connections • Check that printer's out feed directed downward Power on the terminal • Check input voltage 24.5 V and correct polarity connection to the main controller • Check operational communication with the CT—20 cash register, transmit initial parameters • Change clock setting and check that the corresponding change affects the dispenser - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 Aow E 1 Address settings For address setting see Appendix A—Address settings E2 Vehicle presence, barrier position and ticket request button settings Dispensing ticket conditions are set by DIP switches 5 and 6 with the following possibilities: 1 No condition 2 Vehicle presence on the induction loop 3 Vehicle passed the induction loop 4 Vehicle present on the induction loop and barrier position closed {{ Setting table ..,.R ,as O. 1 0. . a .a 0 0 1 1 E 3 Terminal type settings The Terminal type is set by DIP switches 7 and 8 sid ►u?? f 4T ckei.c is"e�zser Moiivil `nreai er k 0 0 0 -30- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 UBAONI Awvq{F,�e�y IIT4)LT Section E: Controller setup The controller setup has the following steps: - Address settings - Vehicle presence and barrier control settings - Terminal type settings Figure 12:Main board connections O O • • O X WERE 5 � • . • • LCD ce . . . . . T. 1. B.A. . . . . . KEYs MP/SW 6.0 a Rela 2 Rela 1 0 O BT1 BT2 TK/SW KB-PR RELAYS OnID • • • • • . • Buzzer • • • w -29- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 R.uvq FPISWwuu Ilnal tT D 6 LOOP detector The Loop detector detects the vehicle presence on the induction loop. LOOP � S F�ULfi 3°MiLE '; 4 Figure 11:Loop detector 1 —Power indicator Led 2—Detect indicator Led 3—Fault indicator Led 4 - Sensitivity switch cover 5—Reset button Switch selectable sensibility Eight sensitivity settings (DIP switches) are available to allow configuration flexibility. The values are listed in the table below,and defined by DIP switches 7,8,9 on the loop detector. (For Proccon detector only-configure DIP switches as shown on detector side label). 1.High � 0.01% �5 F-- F 0.2% 12. 0.02% I°' 10.5% 13. F 1 0.05% 7. F 1% i"' 0.1% 8.Low � 2% Reset Press the reset button. During the reset,the detector self calibrates itself therefore it is recommended that no vehicle should be on the induction loop when resetting. �* -28 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T.I.B.A D 5 RS 485 Connection • +24 0 jo Tx 0 Rx GND 0 X+ Lq C X- U) sn��ia 1 2 T. I. B.A. 3 0 BS-MPSW-V6 Figure 10:RS 485 connection-Sector 2 Remove approx. 8 mm of the insulation at the ends of the wires Clamp the wires to the suitable position as shown in Fig 6 (1)Tx+ (2)Tx— (3)Shield PS485 connection .� .�. 0 0 oo oho 0 0 0 oo FT--J� . . . . . . . . .- T.I.B.A. . : a : a a s . . . .. . . . . . s u o 0 BS-MPSW-V6 -27- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 Co.Wf�..h.w.. TICAL' . IluffrM♦p^!4 .0 I If4j 4T D 4 Connection to the barrier control unit and position sensor ou°uur caxears . U v C. C) U 07 Goftact f n n r. 4 3 2 1 c�•, '*, > Figure 9: Barrier connection Sector 2 Remove approx. 8 mm of the insulation at the ends of the wire Clamp the pair wires to the suitable positions as follows 1 Open gate arm 2 Close gate arm 3 Arm position sensor(By default N.C.when the barrier position is up) 4 Damaged arm sensor(By default N.C. when the barrier position is arm-lost) ATTNTION: Before connecting any type of input sensor Check With Multi-meter that you receive the right response/ A^ -26- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T.%B:ie►. aw..awA;ww....�in•1.r D 3 Intercom Connection 0 1 LIP 0 0 Intercom Loop Detector ♦ � a Figure 8:Intercom connection-Sector 2 For Aiphone only Remove approx. 8 mm of the insulation at the ends of the wires Clamp the colored wires of the Intercom positions in the following the order: RED O BLK+WHITE O —� To Master Intercom GREEN O A"^ -25 - Ticket Validator–Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T.i-J Rear board Supported options ©ri�i�utto�;,' e ,�.. ,,:. �et,�nt►o�a, � Termtt�;attair; Rs485 communication IN/out RS485 communication 3 pin connector.—x-,x+,shield Open Barrier Relay I —N.0/N.C.Dry contact Relay 1 -6 pin connector—N.O.a-2 (common),a-3 —N.C.a-2 (common),a-I Open Gate Relay 1—N.0/N.C.Dry contact Relay 1 -6 pin connector—N.O.a-5 (common),a4 —N.C.a-5 (common),a-6 Close Barrier Relay 2—N.0/N.C.Dry contact Relay 2-6 pin connector—N.O.b-2 (common),b-3 —N.C.b-2 (common),b-1 Close Gate Relay—2—N.0/N.C.Dry contact Relay 2-6 pin connector—N.O.b-5 (common),b-4 —N.C.b-5 (common),b-6 N.U.(optional) Relay 3—N.0/N.C.Dry contact Relay 3-6 pin connector—N.O.c-2 (common),c-3 —N.C.c-2 (common),c-1 N.U.(optional) Relay 3—N.0/N.C.Dry contact Relay 3-6 pin connector—N.O.c-5 (common),c4 —N.C.c-5 (common),c-6 Pulse 1 for LPR Relay 4—N.0/N.C.Dry contact Relay 4-6 pin connector—N.O.d-2 (common),d-3 —N.C. d-2 (common),d-1 Pulse 2 for LPR Relay 4—N.0/N.C. Dry contact Relay 4-6 pin connector—N.O.d-5 (common),d-4 —N.C.d-5 (common),d-6 Arm-up input signal Dry contact input Or 12-24DCV input 5 pin connector—2,3 Arm Iost input signal Dry contact input Or 12-24DCV input 5 pin connector—7,8 Loop 2 external presence Dry contact input Or 12-24DCV input 5 pin connector—9,10 OR Ext barrier input signal Dry contact input Or 12-24DCV input Define by jumper—17,18 ROOM key reader input signal Dry contact input Or 12-24DCV input 5 pin connector—19,20 Loop 1 external presence Dry contact input Or 12-24DCV input 5 pin connector—4,5 LOOP wire—In Used by Loop detector 2 pin connector RS232—N.U.(optional) RS232—N.U.(optional) 5 pin connector RX.TX,GND Jumpers define Right jumper—Dry contact input(Default)2,3 Right jumper— 12-24DCV input, 1,2 Left jumper—Dry contact input(Default) Left jumper— 12-24DCV input, 1,2 '"► -24- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 TI.B.A. R.u..a•pRW .,.I��R11 R.r D2 REAR board definition Figure 7: Rear Panel connections 01 . . . . . . 0 z . e S • Intercom 9 Loop Detector . � •• O O O i24 O O +5 Q CL O O Q Tx O O O O U O Rx GND O O O 0 O • X+ •, - - •,, X_ ;- I 4 3 2 1 • Sl Wd •••• EARTH O T.I.B.A. 0 BS-MPSW-V6 0 ••0 ' -23 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 g fa.ryl..;..1 Fmw. T.1.B.A. • Remove about 8 mm of the insulation of the individual wires. • Connect the external ground lead to position E of the terminal block • Connect the neutral lead to position N of the terminal block • Connect the conducting lead to position L of the terminal block • If necessary shorten the supply cables to the required connection length CAUTION Do not damage the insulation of the individual wires +& ATTENTION Ne pas causer des de dts a Fisolant The automatic circuit breaker can be switched on for testing purposes but it should stay off until final connection is completed RO' -22 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T.1.B.A. MuvrppR,p.p..0 II.NI LT D 9 Connection power supply 1 3 00 2 N 5 O 0 0 0 0 0 �b6LQ LAMBDA OC 4x ' co- Q Q Q N Y.H- FL2520 r�~ HEATER ——� Blue Brawn Yellow FLH 060 4 Figure 6:Terminal block-Sector 1 6 1 -Automatic circuit breaker power supply unit 2-Earth lead (E) Yellow wire 3 —Neutral lead(N)Blue wire 4—Line lead(L)Brown wire 5—Power supply unit 6—Heater CAUTION Ai Make sure that the power supply is externally disconnected and that it cannot be switched on ATTENTION Assurez vous que Palimentation est toupee et qu'on ne peut pas brancher Pinterru teur '* -21 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 Section D : Wiring -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------INNER HOUSING 0 FHt= o Interwom 00 LJ L-C.— 00 0 0 0 W�Ney banal 0 0 0 0 0 0 i 4 3 2 1 BAR1F Jumps 0 0 0 " 0 T.I.B.A. 0 0 Bs-mpsw-VB 7p 11 Y- RI1 HN HII M GATE-RS485+INTER4 I I r-—--,L"1 F6,__.--7 WTERCOMjj RS485 j L-_._-.-J L------ Figure 5:Rear Panel wiring The electrical drawing includes the following sectors Sector I - 110-220 VAC Sector 2- 24 VDC -20- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 Tt, II�M)4T C 3 Pre manufactured/manufactured loops and installation instruction When using pre manufactured loops follow the manufacturer's instruction. When using a self manufactured loop follow the instruction below: - -------------------------------------------------- , ,-- �' ---- Lead in/out Wire , To equipment 1 , , , , l Figure 4: Loop Schematic - There should be overlapping cuts to prevent sharp angles - The loop resistance should be lower than 2 Ohm and it should be measured before installation - The insulation resistance against earth ground must be higher than 5 M ohm at 500 V - The lead—in length should not exceed 50 feet - The loop wires must not be installed near high voltage cables Note : foundation materials such as concrete or asphalt will not influence the loop field - 19- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 OOW T.LB.A. Section C: Induction loop installation C 1 General The loop detector operates on the principle of detecting inductance changes. The detector monitors the inductance of an insulated electrical wire placed in the road.Any metallic object such as a car,modifies the magnetic field of the surrounding and is immediately detected by the loop detector The detector tuning range is 15— 1500 micro Henry C 2 Loop inductance calculation The loop inductance is calculated as follows 2 L = Px t + t 4 P = 2L + 2W L=Inductance in micro Henry P=Perimeter in feet t=Number of turns - 18 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 U."d . Mounting Bolts 1/2 "Bolts. (12-13 MM). Bolts type for example:- mmnn�ummm�r �, ter, tummuu�i�uuumi u-�JJ 0 o Larger image see appendix C 300 MM 400 MM - 17- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 11wvAF, • IIN14T B3 Mounting the housing to the ground ATTNTION : If you attend to operate the equipment with a LOOP car detector, Install the loop Wire first (Section Q, And then continue with the following steps. To mount the housing to the ground follow the instruction bellow:- 1 Place the pedestal base on the concrete foundation 2 Using a marker follow the outside contour of the housing base 3 Mark the location of the mounting holes and check again placing the housing 4 Drill 12MM or 1/2"four mounting holes. 5 Insert the cables through the pedestal,Place the base and secure it with the anchor bolts. 6 Remove the four screws from the shell bottom plate.Place the shell on the pedestal, 7 Insert the 4 screws from the shell and thorough the pedestal. Screw fitted Nuts with bolts. Figure 3:MP/SW 30—Mounting Dimensions - 16- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 OPW iql� B 2 Cable requirements • Prepare All cables Length — 2.5 Meter(8 Feet) out of ground Minimum requirements to operate: >`'' .;. ,, `,' � ' ," '"�+�``�` fi■e.��>Qi` E� O yet Proper power source Power 3X1.5 mm solid minimum According to country standards approved by authorized electrician Example cable: 22 AWG Western Wire Part Number:AF106F90 Cash register or closest Communication 2 Conductors,Interlaced 8 shielded spot of the parking 6x22#PVC Insulated and Jacketed Shielded LF RS485 network Control Cable Example cable: Western Wire Part Number:AF106F90 Barrier control 22AWG,4 Conductors,interlaced Barrier 6x22#PVC Insulated and Jacketed Shielded LF Control Cable Additional requirements for the following options: Example cable: Western Wire Part Number:AF106F90 Barrier arm-up signal 2 Conductors,22AWG,interlaced Barrier 6x22#PVC Insulated and Jacketed Shielded LF Control Cable Example cable: Western Wire Part Number:AF106F90 Barrier arm-lost signal 2 Conductors,22AWG,interlaced Barrier 6x22#PVC Insulated and Jacketed Shielded LF Control Cable 2 conductors per sub(Home run) Use shielded multi conductor wire Or 3 conductors per sub Intercom (Multi—master system). NOT twisted pairs Master (Aiphone Model) 2 conductors per sub(Home run) Intercom 22 AWG—UNTIL 650' Or 3 conductors per sub 18 AWG— UNTIL 1600' (multi—master system) Example wire:WEICO WEICO NO.3216-0.(Black colored). Stranded Tinned Copper,.032"Nominal Insulation Loop 16AWG wire/600V,interlaced Thickness LANE Temperature Rating:-4WC to+1059C Voltage Rating:600V Passes UL VW-1 Flame Test SIZE:16 AWG STRAND:26/30 NOM.O.D. IN .125 RULES • RS485— use separated cable for communication • Intercom— use separated cable for intercom • Barrier control— open/close signal can be combined in same cable • Barrier signals— arm-up, arm-lost can be combined in same cable 4*"k - 15 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 TI B:A. 4w'rAiDR. vv ltT4al tT i 0152 i i o 0 ri N � C y O IJ� \ N F 1 j 2�D.0 * See Appendix)E for larger image. '* - 14- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 V.B.A� 8 1 Foundation requirements • The SW-30 is suitable for mounting on concrete or other non-combustible surface only. L'SW-30 peut titre montee uniquement sur une surface en beton ou toute autre surface non combustible. • The SW-30 has to be installed on a concrete foundation • The concrete foundation must be sufficiently rigid to withstand the weight and bending moments applied by the terminal after the installation. • The foundation has to have a smooth concrete finish,non flammable and precisely leveled. • A reinforcement steel cage is essential for the stability of the foundation • Conduit pipes with different diameters must be installed to run the mains supply cable,the control cables and the induction lead wires. An appropriate cavity should be left to enable the conduit pipe installation. The foundation shall have the following dimension:Depth: 30 CM Area: 40X40 CM min. Figure 2:MP/SW-30—Pedestal Dimensions - 13 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 pill- T.i B:ie►. AuoAAl�!fM .IM)42 Section B: Location requirements CAUTION Heavy device A! Move the device with the a suitable lifting instrument and wear safety boots ATTENTION Materiel lourd Deplacez le materiel avec des apparels a soulever corres ondants • The terminal is qualified for indoor,protected or outdoor locations. • Use signs to clearly display danger areas • Install the barrier gate and the gate arm at least 2.5 M away from any rigid object or pedestrian • Place warning signs to warn pedestrians walking near the gates. • It is essential to provide separate footpath near the entrance lane and to mark pedestrian areas • The area requirements for the installation measures are: See Appendix E for larger image. Figure I:MP/SW 30—Housing Dimensions w 475.9 I_ 0 O O Q N O O N O O LrI N { 36_9'i_oo I - 12 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T.1 B:A. A5 Safety on site CAUTION Verify that the unit is always locked to avoid endangering third parties ATTENTION IVeri iez la cloture du s steme pour eviter des de dts aux vehicules passants CAUTION Select recognizable warning signs to the drivers approaching the barrier ATTENTION Installez des si naux res ecti s pour pr&enir ceux qui approchent la harriere CAUTION Ensure that the barrier's danger zone is clearly marked to avoid pedestrians and unauthorized vehicles access. ATTENTION Signalez la zone dangereuse au pietons et aux vehicules dont Ventree est interdite 0IOW - 11 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 ww T.�.e a swor,ag�„�.,.....P•k�4r CAUTION Voltage adjustment: Before connecting the product to the power line,make sure the voltage of the power source matches the requirements of the product , as marked on the label located near the power connectors ATTENTION Reglage de tension : Veuillez que la tension de la source d'alimentation soit conforme a la tension de consommation du materiel(Affiche sur l'etiquette pres des connecteurs de tension) CAUTION Before working on equipment connected to the power line or telecommunication lines ,remove jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts i ATTENTION rOtez les objets metalliques que vous portez avant d'approcher du materiel s tension CAUTION Battery precautions : Caution : To eliminate the risk of battery explosion, the battery should not be replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions ATTENTION Precaution batterie Remplacez une batterie avec une autre du meme type pour eviter les risques d'explosion. Debarrassez les batteries usees selon les instructions en cours - 10- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 low TI.B.A. Fu.v4kfti!w ..�If4)GT CAUTION A readily accessible 2-Pole circuit breaker,branch circuit overcurrent protector,rated maximum 20A, certified in accordance with the national code A--i and requirements, shall be installed in building installation for disconnection from mains supply ATTENTION Un disjoncteur a 2 p6les facilement accessible et un dispositif de protection de surintensW du circuit de derivationd'une puissance de 20 amperes maximum, certifies conformement au code national et aux exigences, devront titre installes dans le bdtiment pour la deconnexion de Valimentation secteur CAUTION Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes ATTENTION Veuillez que l'installation electrique soit conforme a la reglementation existante dans votre pays CAUTION A readily accessible device who's On and OFF positions are clearly marked and is suitably rated and approved,is installed in the equipment ATTENTION Un interrupteur,,facilement reconnu et utilisable ayant la mesure appropriee et a prouve, est installe sur le materiel CAUTION Suitable for mounting on concrete or other non-consumable surface only ATTENTION Il est recommande d installer le systeme sur des fondations de beton ou pared (materiel non inflammable) CAUTION Public network connection: The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce risk,there are restrictions on the diameter of wires in telecom cables,between the equipment and the mating connectors.To reduce the risk of fire,use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords ATTENTION Cablage pour reseau de telecommunication : Les cables appartenant au reseau de telecommunication du bdtiment peuvent presenter un risque dans le cas que les cdbles,exposes, sont en contact avec les lignes de tension AC Pour reduire les risques it y a des restrictions en ce qui concerne le diametre des cdbles de telecommunication. Utilisez les cdbles Num 26 AWG ou plus lar es our diminuer les ris ues d'in ammation -9- Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T.i.B.A. IIwvJIr.PnlN�"IITN)4T CAUTION High voltage: Disconnect the product from the power line before removing the cover.Any adjustment and maintenance of the opened device should be done only while the device is disconnected from its power source and should only Ai qu be performed by alified ersonnel ATTENTION Haute tension :Coupez Valimentation du systeme avant d'6ter le couver Tout operation de reglage ou maintenance sera faite quand le systeme est debranche Ces operations seront faites par des personnes qualifaees CAUTION Grounding: Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last. Do not connect telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment.Make sure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting the ground. Grounding is provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a protective earth terminal. The earth lug should be connected to the protective earth at all times,by a wire with a diameter of 16 AWG or wider. ATTENTION Brancher a terre :Il est obligatoire de brancher a terre en premiere et la couper a la fin Veuillez a ne pas connecter des cables de telecommunication a du materielle qui West pas brancher a terre. Il est recommande de brancher a terre la prise principale d'alimentation. La cable de connexion aura au moins le diametee 16AWG. CAUTION Unit is intended to be supplied from bulding wiring, Overvoltage Category II, maximum mains transient 2500Vpk.If the unit is installed in Overvoltage Category higher than Overvoltage Category II, external overvoltage protective device compliant with IEC 61643 standard and NEC/CEC shall be provided in building installation to reduce mains transients to Overvoltage Category 11, maximum mains transient 2500Vpk ATTENTION L'unW est destinee a&re alimentee a partir de cables de categorie de surtension II, avec transitoire de secteur de 2 500 Vpk maximum. Si l'unW est installee sur un dispositif de categorie de surtension superieure, it sera alors necessaire d'utiliser un dispositif de protection de surintensite externe conforme a la norme CEI61643 et NEC/CECpour r6duire les transitoires de secteur. - 8 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 iql. A4 Power Supply safety instructions Alimentation,Electricite CAUTION All the installation should be in according to valid national standard and regulations ATTENTION Les installations electriques seront conformes a la reglementation existante dans votre pays CAUTION All brands circuits for hard wired units must be suitable to the unit ratings ATTENTION Les fils electriques auront l'epaisseur necessaire pour tenir l'intensite du courant CAUTION Replacement of any electrical components must be done with new ones ■ with identical ratio ATTENTION Le remplacement d'une piece defectueuse sera faite par une piece ayant les memes parametres electriques. CAUTION It is necessary to read the related information about the electrical components to assure safe operation ATTENTION Il est obligatoire de lire l'information concertante une composante electrique avant de l'utiliser CAUTION Ensure that the barrier's danger zone is clearly marked to avoid pedestrians and unauthorized vehicles access. ATTENTION An Signalez la zone dangereuse au pietons et aux vMicules dont Ventree est interdite - 7 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 LLB.A. ew�wa.grp.p..0 ia.l..r A3 Operating safety instructions CAUTION Installation of the ticket validator(especially the electrical connection) should be carried out by a licensed technician. Installation,assembly,removal and adjustment of additional electric components also should be carried out by licensed technician ATTENTION L'installation du systeme sera faite par un technicien autorisee T.LB.A. L'installation de nouveaux composants, les remplacements , les ajustements A materiel seront fail par un technicien autorise T I.B.A.. CAUTION The shell of the parking should be completed before installing the SW-30 Ticket validator. Dirt,dust and building implements can endanger the sensitive electronic arts and other mechanism included in the system ATTENTION Le bdtiment devrait etre fini avant!'installation du systeme L'ambiance poussiereuse peut endommager les composants electronique du systeme aussi que d'autre mecanismes. CAUTION The SW-30 Ticket validator should be coupled with barriers authorized by the manufacturer ATTENTION Le systeme SW-30 sera accouple a des barrieres autorisees par le producteur T.I.B.A. - 6 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T-wCN-"'4m0,4 Section A: SAFETY INFORMATION Al General safety information The SW—30 ticket validator installation guide is part of the manuals associated to the product We recommend initially to read the Operating and Maintenance instructions guide. A2 Safety instructions pictograms Signaux et instructions de securite Special instructions are given in a table with the related pictogram and have the following meaning: Les instructions &rites dans les tables sont liees aux signaux suivants low Caution: The operator should follow exactly the instructions given in the table Attention :L'utilisateur doit suivre exactement les instructions dans la table 1 Useful information Information utile Hazardous voltage Tension dangereuse fin„ - 5 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T.i B' „...aa. auwl4r Abbreviations and definitions PARC Parking Access &Revenue Control Systems A.TechnicianAuthorized technicians are technicians trained by T.I.B.A. or by authorized Dealers/partners to perform maintenance operation written in this manual A.Dealer Authorized Dealer LPR License Plate Recognition system Radio Frequency Reader: The reader that checks if the proximity badge is valid AVI Automatic Vehicle Identification: Hands free access control. The RFID system has a reading range up to 10 meters A.Installer An installer technician trained to install T.I.B.A equipment by Authorized Dealer Oft-, -4 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 T.I.B.A. Rw..a►A�w •.��ru)l} APPENDIX LIST Appendix A — Address settings .................................................41 Appendix B — Installation Confirmation Form............................42 Appendix C — Dimensions.........................................................43 Appendix D — Wiring conversion tables ....................................48 Appendix E — Schematic layouts............................................... 52 Appendix F - Advanced motorized reader settings .................. 53 - 3 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3 Up"InN)lT Table of contents Abbreviations and definitions ......................................................4 Section A: SAFETY INFORMATION.......................................... 5 AlGeneral safety information..................................................................................................................5 A2Safety instructions pictograms............................................................................................................5 A3Operating safety instructions..............................................................................................................6 A4Power Supply safety instructions........................................................................................................7 A5Safety on site.......................................................................................................................................11 Section B: Location requirements ....................................... 12 B1 Foundation requirements..................................................................................................................13 B2 Cable requirements............................................................................................................................15 B3Mounting the housing to the ground................................................................................................16 Section C: Induction loop installation ........................................ 18 C1 General................................................................................................................................................18 C2 Loop inductance calculation..............................................................................................................18 C 3 Pre manufactured/manufactured loops and installation instruction.............................................14 Section D : Wiring ..................................................................... 20 D2REAR board definition......................................................................................................................23 D3 Intercom Connection..........................................................................................................................25 D4 Connection to the barrier control unit and position sensor............................................................26 D5 RS 485 Connection............................................................................................................................27 D6 LOOP detector...................................................................................................................................28 Section E: Controller setup ....................................................... 29 E1 Address settings..................................................................................................................................30 E 2 Vehicle presence,barrier position and ticket request button settings...........................................30 E3 Terminal type settings........................................................................................................................30 Section F: Commissioning and final test................................... 31 F1 Preliminary Inspection.......................................................................................................................31 F2 Operational checks..............................................................................................................................32 Section G: Motorized barcode reader ....................................... 33 Section H: Thermal receipt printer ............................................ 36 GIPrinter description.............................................................................................................................37 G2Changing the paper roll.....................................................................................................................38 G3General Maintenance instructions....................................................................................................40 -2 - Ticket Validator—Installation Guide Rev. 1.3